COMMENTARY EUROCODE 2

Size: px
Start display at page:

Download "COMMENTARY EUROCODE 2"

Transcription

1 EUROCODE 2 COMMENTARY 1

2

3 EUROCODE 2 COMMENTARY

4 COMMENTARY EUROCODE 2 Copyright: European Concrete Platform ASBL, June 2008 All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of the European Concrete Platform ASBL. Published by the European Concrete Platform ASBL Editor: Jean-Pierre Jacobs 8 rue Volta 1050 Brussels Layout & Printing by The European Concrete Platform All information in this document is deemed to be accurate by the European Concrete Platform ASBL at the time of going into press. It is given in good faith. Information on European Concrete Platform document does not create any liability for its Members. While the goal is to keep this information timely and accurate, the European Concrete Platform ASBL cannot guarantee either. If errors are brought to its attention, they will be corrected. The opinions reflected in this document are those of the authors and the European Concrete Platform ASBL cannot be held liable for any view expressed therein. All advice or information from the European Concrete Platform ASBL is intended for those who will evaluate the significance and limitations of its contents and take responsibility for its use and application. No liability (including for negligence) for any loss resulting from such advice or information is accepted. Readers should note that all European Concrete Platform publications are subject to revision from time to time and therefore ensure that they are in possession of the latest version. This publication is based on the publication: "Guida all'uso dell'eurocodice 2" prepared by AICAP; the Italian Association for Reinforced and Prestressed Concrete, on behalf of the the Italian Cement Organziation AITEC, and on background documents prepared by the Eurocode 2 Project Teams Members, during the preparation of the EN version of Eurocode 2 (prof A.W. Beeby, prof H. Corres Peiretti, prof J. Walraven, prof B. Westerberg, prof R.V. Whitman). Authorization has been received or is pending from organisations or individuals for their specific contributions.

5 FOREWARD The introduction of Eurocodes is a challenge and opportunity for the European cement and concrete industry. These design codes, considered to be the most advanced in the world, will lead to a common understanding of the design principles for concrete structures for owners, operators and users, design engineers, contractors and the manufacturers of concrete products. The advantages of unified codes include the preparation of common design aids and software and the establishment of a common understanding of research and development needs in Europe. As with any new design code, it is important to have an understanding of the principles and background, as well as design aids to assist in the design process. The European cement and concrete industry represented by CEMBUREAU, BIBM and ERMCO recognised this need and set up a task group to prepare two documents, Commentary to EN 1992 and Worked Examples to EN The Commentary to EN 1992 captures te background to the code and Worked Examples to EN 1992 demonstrates the practical application of the code. Both the documents were prepared by a team led by Professor Giuseppe Mancini, Chairman of CEN TC 250/SC2 Concrete Structures, and peer reviewed by three eminent engineers who played a leading role in the development of the concrete Eurocode: Professor Narayanan, Professor Spehl and Professor Walraven. This is an excellent example of pan-european collaboration and BIBM, CEMBUREAU and ERMCO are delighted to make these authoritative documents available to design engineers, software developers and all others with an interest in promoting excellence in concrete design throughout Europe. As chairman of the Task Group, I would like to thank the authors, peer reviewers and members of the joint Task Force for working efficiently and effectively in producing these documents. Dr Pal Chana Chairman, CEMBUREAU/BIBM/ERMCO TF 5.5: Eurocodes

6

7 Attributable Foreword to the Commentary and Worked Examples to EC2 Eurocodes are one of the most advanced suite of structural codes in the world. They embody the collective experience and knowledge of whole of Europe. They are born out of an ambitious programme initiated by the European Union. With a wealth of code writing experience in Europe, it was possible to approach the task in a rational and logical manner. Eurocodes reflect the results of research in material technology and structural behaviour in the last fifty years and they incorporate all modern trends in structural design. Like many current national codes in Europe, Eurocode 2 (EC 2) for concrete structures draws heavily on the CEB Model Code. And yet the presentation and terminology, conditioned by the agreed format for Eurocodes, might obscure the similarities to many national codes. Also EC 2 in common with other Eurocodes, tends to be general in character and this might present difficulty to some designers at least initially. The problems of coming to terms with a new set of codes by busy practising engineers cannot be underestimated. This is the backdrop to the publication of Commentary and Worked Examples to EC 2 by Professor Mancini and his colleagues. Commissioned by CEMBUREAU, BIBM, EFCA and ERMCO this publication should prove immensely valuable to designers in discovering the background to many of the code requirements. This publication will assist in building confidence in the new code, which offers tools for the design of economic and innovative concrete structures. The publication brings together many of the documents produced by the Project Team during the development of the code. The document is rich in theoretical explanations and draws on much recent research. Comparisons with the ENV stage of EC2 are also provided in a number of cases. The chapter on EN 1990 (Basis of structural design) is an added bonus and will be appreciated by practioners. Worked examples further illustrate the application of the code and should promote understanding. The commentary will prove an authentic companion to EC 2 and deserves every success. Professor R S Narayanan Chairman CEN/TC 250/SC2 ( )

8 Foreword to Commentary to Eurocode 2 and Worked Examples When a new code is made, or an existing code is updated, a number of principles should be regarded: 1. Codes should be based on clear and scientifically well founded theories, consistent and coherent, corresponding to a good representation of the structural behaviour and of the material physics. 2. Codes should be transparent. That means that the writers should be aware, that the code is not prepared for those who make it, but for those who will use it. 3. New developments should be recognized as much as possible, but not at the cost of too complex theoretical formulations. 4. A code should be open-minded, which means that it cannot be based on one certain theory, excluding others. Models with different degrees of complexity may be offered. 5. A code should be simple enough to be handled by practicing engineers without considerable problems. On the other hand simplicity should not lead to significant lack of accuracy. Here the word accuracy should be well understood. Often socalled accurate formulations, derived by scientists, cannot lead to very accurate results, because the input values can not be estimated with accuracy. 6. A code may have different levels of sophistication. For instance simple, practical rules can be given, leading to conservative and robust designs. As an alternative more detailed design rules may be offered, consuming more calculation time, but resulting in more accurate and economic results. For writing a Eurocode, like EC-2, another important condition applies. International consensus had to be reached, but not on the cost of significant concessions with regard to quality. A lot of effort was invested to achieve all those goals. It is a rule for every project, that it should not be considered as finalized if implementation has not been taken care of. This book may, further to courses and trainings on a national and international level, serve as an essential and valuable contribution to this implementation. It contains extensive background information on the recommendations and rules found in EC2. It is important that this background information is well documented and practically available, as such increasing the transparency. I would like to thank my colleagues of the Project Team, especially Robin Whittle, Bo Westerberg, Hugo Corres and Konrad Zilch, for helping in getting together all background information. Also my colleague Giuseppe Mancini and his Italian team are gratefully acknowledged for providing a set of very illustrative and practical working examples. Finally I would like to thank CEMBURAU, BIBM, EFCA and ERMCO for their initiative, support and advice to bring out this publication. Joost Walraven Convenor of Project Team for EC2 ( )

9

10 Eurocode 2 Commentary Reading key Clause 2.1 of the EN Comment on Clause 2.1 of EN Comment on Clause of EN without C : first paragraph of the comment on clause

11 Guide to EC2 Summary COMMENTARY TO EUROCODE 2 - SUMMARY SECTION 1 SYMBOLS SECTION 2 BASIS OF DESIGN REQUIREMENTS PRINCIPLES OF LIMIT STATE DESIGN BASIC VARIABLES VERIFICATION BY THE PARTIAL FACTOR METHOD DESIGN ASSISTED BY TESTING SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS FOR FOUNDATIONS REQUIREMENTS FOR FASTENINGS SECTION 3 MATERIALS CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL PRESTRESSING STEEL PRESTRESSING DEVICES SECTION 4 DURABILITY AND COVER TO REINFORCEMENT SECTION 5 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS GENERAL GEOMETRIC IMPERFECTIONS IDEALISATION OF THE STRUCTURE LINEAR ELASTIC ANALYSIS LINEAR ANALYSIS WITH LIMITED REDISTRIBUTION PLASTIC ANALYSIS NON-LINEAR ANALYSIS ANALYSIS OF SECOND ORDER EFFECTS WITH AXIAL LOAD LATERAL INSTABILITY OF SLENDER BEAMS PRESTRESSED MEMBERS AND STRUCTURES ANALYSIS FOR SOME PARTICULAR STRUCTURAL MEMBERS SECTION 6 ULTIMATE LIMIT STATES (ULS) BENDING WITH OR WITHOUT AXIAL FORCE SHEAR Page 1-1

12 Guide to EC2 Summary 6.3 TORSION PUNCHING DESIGN WITH STRUT AND TIE MODELS ANCHORAGES AND LAPS PARTIALLY LOADED AREAS FATIGUE SECTION 7. SERVICEABILITY LIMIT STATES (SLS) GENERAL STRESS LIMITATION CRACK CONTROL DEFLECTION CONTROL SECTION 8 DETAILING OF REINFORCEMENT AND PRESTRESSING TENDONS - GENERAL GENERAL SPACING OF BARS PERMISSIBLE MANDREL DIAMETERS FOR BENT BARS ANCHORAGE OF LONGITUDINAL REINFORCEMENT ANCHORAGE OF LINKS AND SHEAR REINFORCEMENT ANCHORAGE BY WELDED BARS LAPS AND MECHANICAL COUPLERS ADDITIONAL RULES FOR LARGE DIAMETER BARS BUNDLED BARS PRESTRESSING TENDONS SECTION 11 LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE GENERAL MATERIALS Page 1-2

13 Guide to EC2 Section 1 SECTION 1 SYMBOLS SECTION 1. SYMBOLS For the purposes of this document, the following symbols apply. Note: the notation used is based on ISO 3898:1987 Latin upper case letters A Accidental action A Cross sectional area A c Cross sectional area of concrete A p Area of a prestressing tendon or tendons A s Cross sectional area of reinforcement A s,min minimum cross sectional area of reinforcement A sw Cross sectional area of shear reinforcement D Diameter of mandrel D Ed Fatigue damage factor E Effect of action E c, E c(28) Tangent modulus of elasticity of normal weight concrete at a stress of c = 0 and at 28 days E c,eff Effective modulus of elasticity of concrete E cd Design value of modulus of elasticity of concrete E cm Secant modulus of elasticity of concrete E c(t) Tangent modulus of elasticity of normal weight concrete at a stress of c = 0 and at time t E p Design value of modulus of elasticity of prestressing steel E s Design value of modulus of elasticity of reinforcing steel E Bending stiffness EQU Static equilibrium F Action F d Design value of an action F k Characteristic value of an action G k Characteristic permanent action Second moment of area of concrete section L Length M Bending moment M Ed Design value of the applied internal bending moment N Axial force N Ed Design value of the applied axial force (tension or compression) P Prestressing force P 0 Initial force at the active end of the tendon immediately after stressing Q k Characteristic variable action Q fat Characteristic fatigue load R Resistance S Internal forces and moments S First moment of area SLS Serviceability limit state T Torsional moment T Ed Design value of the applied torsional moment ULS Ultimate limit state V Shear force Design value of the applied shear force V Ed Latin lower case letters a a a b b w d d d g e f c Distance Geometrical data Deviation for geometrical data Overall width of a cross-section, or actual flange width in a T or L beam Width of the web on T, I or L beams Diameter; Depth Effective depth of a cross-section Largest nominal maximum aggregate size Eccentricity Compressive strength of concrete Page 1-1

14 Guide to EC2 Section 1 f cd Design value of concrete compressive strength f ck Characteristic compressive cylinder strength of concrete at 28 days f cm Mean value of concrete cylinder compressive strength f ctk Characteristic axial tensile strength of concrete f ctm Mean value of axial tensile strength of concrete f p Tensile strength of prestressing steel f pk Characteristic tensile strength of prestressing steel f p0,1 0,1% proof-stress of prestressing steel f p0,1k Characteristic 0,1% proof-stress of prestressing steel f 0,2k Characteristic 0,2% proof-stress of reinforcement f t Tensile strength of reinforcement f tk Characteristic tensile strength of reinforcement f y Yield strength of reinforcement f yd Design yield strength of reinforcement f yk Characteristic yield strength of reinforcement f ywd Design yield of shear reinforcement h Height h Overall depth of a cross-section i Radius of gyration k Coefficient; Factor l (or l or L) Length; Span m Mass, reduced moment n reduced axial force r Radius 1/r Curvature at a particular section t Thickness t Time being considered t 0 The age of concrete at the time of loading u Perimeter of concrete cross-section, having area A c u,v,w Components of the displacement of a point x Neutral axis depth x,y,z Coordinates z Lever arm of internal forces Greek lower case letters A C F F,fat C,fat G M P Q S S,fat f g m c c1 cu u uk Angle; ratio Angle; ratio; coefficient Partial factor Partial factor for accidental actions A Partial factor for concrete Partial factor for actions, F Partial factor for fatigue actions Partial factor for fatigue of concrete Partial factor for permanent actions, G Partial factor for a material property, taking account of uncertainties in the material property itself, in geometric deviation and in the design model used Partial factor for actions associated with prestressing, P Partial factor for variable actions, Q Partial factor for reinforcing or prestressing steel Partial factor for reinforcing or prestressing steel under fatigue loading Partial factor for actions without taking account of model uncertainties Partial factor for permanent actions without taking account of model uncertainties Partial factors for a material property, taking account only of uncertainties in the material property Increment/redistribution ratio Reduction factor/distribution coefficient Compressive strain in the concrete Compressive strain in the concrete at the peak stress f c Ultimate compressive strain in the concrete Strain of reinforcement or prestressing steel at maximum load Characteristic strain of reinforcement or prestressing steel at maximum load Angle Slenderness ratio Page 1-2

15 Guide to EC2 Section 1 Coefficient of friction between the tendons and their ducts Poisson's ratio Strength reduction factor for concrete cracked in shear Ratio of bond strength of prestressing and reinforcing steel Oven-dry density of concrete in kg/m Value of relaxation loss (in %), at 1000 hours after tensioning and at a mean temperature of 20 C l Reinforcement ratio for longitudinal reinforcement w Reinforcement ratio for shear reinforcement c Compressive stress in the concrete cp Compressive stress in the concrete from axial load or prestressing cu Compressive stress in the concrete at the ultimate compressive strain cu Torsional shear stress Diameter of a reinforcing bar or of a prestressing duct n Equivalent diameter of a bundle of reinforcing bars (t,t 0) Creep coefficient, defining creep between times t and t 0, related to elastic deformation at 28 days (,t 0) Final value of creep coefficient Factors defining representative values of variable actions 0 for combination values 1 for frequent values for quasi-permanent values 2 Page 1-3

16 Guide to EC2 Section 2 SECTION 2 BASIS OF DESIGN 2.1 Requirements SECTION 2 BASIS OF DESIGN C2.1 Requirements Eurocode 2, Section 2, Part 1.1 states that concrete structures should be designed in accordance with the general rules of EN1990 and with actions defined in EN EN 1992 has some additional requirements. In particular, the basic requirements of EN1990 Section 2 are deemed to be satisfied for all concrete structures if limit state design is carried out with the partial factor method in accordance with EN1990, and if actions are defined in accordance with EN1991, and if combinations of actions in accordance with EN1990, and finally if resistance, durability and serviceability are dealt with in accordance with EN Reliability management C2.1.2 Reliability management EC2 points and refer to EN1990 section 2 for all rules in relation to reliability, design working life and quality management measures. These rules, as well as the basic concepts of structural reliability, will be referred to later. By the definition given by EN1990, structural reliability is the ability of a structure or a structural member to fulfil the specified requirements for which it has been designed; it includes structural safety, serviceability and durability. Given the random nature of quantities involved in structural design (actions, geometry, restraints, strength of materials, etc.), the assessment of structural reliability cannot be set up by deterministic methods, but requires a probabilistic analysis. The objective of safety verification is therefore to keep failure probability, i.e. probability that a certain danger condition is attained or exceeded, below a fixed value. This value is determined as a function of type of construction, influence on safety of people and damage to goods. Every situation which is dangerous for a construction is referred to as a limit state. Once a construction has attained this condition, it is no longer able to fulfil the functions for which it has been designed. Limit states are of two types: ultimate limit states and serviceability limit states - depending on the gravity of their consequences. Exceeding the first causes collapse of the whole structure or of part of it, exceeding the second causes limited damage that makes the structure unfit for the requirements of the project. Exceeding serviceability limit states can be reversible or irreversible: in the first case, no consequences of actions exceeding the specified service requirements will remain once those actions are removed; in the second, case, some consequences will remain. For example, a crack width limit state with limited width is a reversible limit state, whereas one defined by a high width is irreversible (in fact, if the crack width is high, once the actions are removed the cracks cannot close). For a given limit state, let us define S and R as two random variables representing respectively stress and strength. We recall that by stress we mean any effect produced in the structural members by actions applied or by any other effect such as strain, cracking, increase of reinforcing steel corrosion. Strength, on the other hand, means the capacity of a structure to respond to a given stress. A rigorous assessment of structural safety against a relevant limit state can be carried out by first introducing a safety factor F S, defined as the ratio between strength R and stress S, or alternatively by a safety margin M S, defined as the difference between R and S: either F S =R/S, or M S =R-S, Both these factors are random variables like R and S. The distribution of Fs or Ms is then determined on the basis of the statistical distribution of actions, strengths and geometrical dimensions of the structure, also taking account of the randomness of the structural scheme. Finally, the probability of failure is related to a fixed reference period of time T through one of the following expressions: f or P=PR-S 0 =PM 0 P =P R/S 1 =P F 1 S f. P f represents the probability that failure arises, i.e. that the considered limit state is attained or exceeded at least once during T. This analysis (known as level 3 method) is very complex. Because of the difficulty of calculation and of the limitation of available data (data which often fail to give the probabilistic distributions S Page 2-1

17 Guide to EC2 Section 2 necessary for calculation), this method is of limited applicability to the design practice. Alternatively, if only the first and second order moments (averages and standard deviations) of the random variables R and S, but not their statistical distributions, are known, the probability of failure can be estimated based on a index, called the reliability index. Assuming that M S is linear, it was first defined by Cornell as the ratio between the average value M of M S and its standard deviation M: = /. M M In circumstances where R and S are not correlated (note that in case of normal distributions noncorrelation is equivalent to statistical independence), is expressed as follows: 2 2 = R- S/ R+ S, where,,, R S R S are the averages and standard deviations of R and S. This method (known as level 2 method or -method ) does not generally allow assessment of the probability of failure, with the exception of the particular case where the relation between M S and the random variables of the problem is linear and the variables have normal distribution. The probability of failure, i.e. the probability that the safety margin M S assumes non-positive values, is given by the distribution function M of M S calculated in 0: P=PM 0 = 0 f S M Introducing m as the normalized variable of the safety margin M S, MS -M m= M the result: M S = M +m M substituted in the expression of P f gives: P f = P MS 0 = P M + mm 0 = P m - M / M = P m - = m(-) = 1- m() where m indicates the distribution function of m. The reliability index may be expressed in geometrical terms. In fact, if we introduce the normalized strength and stress variables [ r= R- R/ R and s= S- S / S], the limit condition (M S = 0) is represented in the r - s plane by a line that divides the plane into a safe region and an unsafe region (Figure 2.1). The distance from the origin of the axis of this line equals the reliability index (in circumstances where R and S are not correlated), so the verification of safety is carried out by assigning a given value to this distance. Figure 2.1. Geometric representation of the reliability index in the r-s plane The level 2 method is also difficult to apply in practical design because the necessary data are often not available, so that another method is used: the partial factor method or semi-probabilistic method (level 1 method). This method is based on the compliance with a set of rules that ensure the required reliability of the structure by using characteristic values of the problem variables and a series of safety elements. These are represented by partial safety factors, which cover the uncertainties in actions and materials, and by additional elements for uncertainties in geometry, e.g. to allow for the randomness of cover to reinforcement and therefore of the effective depth of a reinforced concrete section. Page 2-2

18 Guide to EC2 Section 2 This method does not require that the designer has any probabilistic knowledge, because the probabilistic aspects of the question of safety are already taken into account in the method calibration process, i.e. in the choice of characteristic values, partial safety factors etc., fixed in the Standards. The method is based on the following assumptions: 1. strength and stress are independent random variables; 2. characteristic values of strength and stress are fixed as fractiles of given order of the respective distributions, on the basis of a given probability; 3. other uncertainties are taken into account by transforming characteristic values into design values, by applying partial safety factors and additional elements; 4. the assessment of safety is positive if the design action effects don't exceed the design strengths. It has to be pointed out that the characteristic values of actions are fixed as those values with a given probability of being exceeded during the service life of the structure only if statistical data are available. Otherwise, characteristic values are fixed as the nominal values prescribed in standards or specifications, or as target values, for example in the case of accidental actions such as impacts from road vehicles, explosions etc Design working life, durability and quality management C2.1.3 Design working life, durability and quality management Independently from the method used for safety evaluation, a structure can be defined as reliable if positive safety measures have been provided for all its limit states during the whole design working life T u. T u is defined as the period for which a structure is assumed to be usable for its intended purpose with anticipated maintenance but without major repair being necessary. Table 2.1 gives the indicative values of design working life for different types of structures. Table 2.1. Indicative design working life [Table (2.1) - EN1990] Design working life Indicative design working life category (years) Examples 1 10 Temporary structures (*) 2 10 to 25 Replaceable structural parts, e.g. gantry girders, bearings 3 15 to 30 Agricultural and similar structures 4 50 Building structures and other common structures Monumental building structures, bridges, and other civil engineering structures (*) Structures or parts of structures that can be dismantled with a view to being re-used should not be considered as temporary. The reliability required for structures [within the scope and field of application of EN1990] shall be achieved through design in accordance with EN1990 to EN1999 and by appropriate execution and quality management measures. EN1990 allows for the choice of different levels of reliability, both for structural resistance and for serviceability. The choice of the levels of reliability for a particular structure should take account of the relevant factors, including : the possible cause and /or mode of reaching a limit state; the possible consequences of failure in terms of risk to life, injury, potential economical losses; public aversion to failure; the expense and procedures necessary to reduce the risk of failure. The levels of reliability relating to structural resistance and serviceability can be achieved by suitable combinations of protective measures (e.g. protection against fire, protection against corrosion, etc.), measures relating to design calculations (e.g. choice of partial factors), measures relating to quality management, measures aimed to reduce errors in design (project supervision) and execution of the structure (inspection in phase of execution) and other kinds of measures. Point (B3.1) of EN1990 Annex B defines three classes based on the consequences of failure or malfunction of the structure (Table 2.2). Page 2-3

19 Guide to EC2 Section 2 Consequences Class CC3 CC2 CC1 Table 2.2. Consequences classes [Table (B1) - EN1990] Description Examples of buildings and civil engineering works Serious consequences for loss of Grandstands, public buildings human life, or for economic, social where consequences of failure are or environmental concerns high (e.g. a concert hall) Moderate consequence for loss of human life; economic, social or environmental consequences considerable Low consequence for loss of human life; economic, social or environmental consequences small or negligible Residential and office buildings, public buildings where consequences of failure are medium (e.g. an office building) Agricultural buildings where people do not normally enter (e.g. storage buildings), greenhouses Classes CC1 and CC2 correspond to importance classes I, II, whereas CC3 corresponds to classes III and IV, as from EN1998.1, Table 4.3. From this table it is apparent that it is the importance of the structure concerned which is the criterion for classification. Three reliability classes (RC1, RC2, RC3) may be associated with the three consequence classes CC1, CC2 and CC3, depending on the reliability index defined above. Table 2.3 gives values of for different values of P f (remembering that the index allows the estimation of P f values only if the relationship between M S and the random variables of the problem is linear and the variables have normal distribution). Table 2.3. Relation between and Pf [Table C1 - EN1990] P f ,28 2,32 3,09 3,72 4,27 4,75 5,20 Recommended minimum values for at ultimate limit states are given in Table 2.4, for reference periods of 1 year and 50 years. A design using EN 1990 with the partial factors given in annex A1 and EN 1991 to EN 1999 is considered generally to lead to a structure with a value greater than 3,8 for a 50 year reference period (Table 2.3), i.e. with a rough probability of attaining the ULS in 50 years of 7, (Table 2.3). Reliability Class Table 2.4. Recommended minimum values of the reliability index (ultimate limit states) [Table (B2)-EN1990] minimum values at ULS 1 year reference period 50 years reference period RC3 5,2 4,3 RC2 4,7 3,8 RC1 4,2 3,3 For the serviceability limit states (irreversible), which are less dangerous and do not concern the safety of people, the failure probability values for structural elements of Class RC2 are roughly 10-1 (1/10) in 50 years and 10-3 (1/1000) in 1 year; this can be deduced from the relation between and P f (Table 2.3) for the values of given in the last row of Table 2.5. Table 2.5. Target values of the reliability index for Class RC2 structural members [Table (C2)-EN1990] Limit state Target reliability index 1 year reference period 50 years reference period Ultimate 4,7 3,8 Fatigue --- 1,5 to 3,8 Serviceability (irreversible) 2,9 1,5 Design supervision and execution inspection measures being equal, reliability differentiation can be achieved by distinguishing classes of partial factors F of actions to be used in combination of actions, and applying multiplication factor K F1, different for each reliability class. Values for K F1 are given in Table 2.6. Page 2-4

20 Guide to EC2 Section 2 Table 2.6. KF1 factor for actions [Table (B3)-EN1990] K F1 factor Reliability class for actions RC1 RC2 RC3 K F1 0,9 1,0 1,1 Measures of design and execution management and quality control are aimed at eliminating failures due to gross errors, and at ensuring that the design resistance is achieved. Design supervision and execution inspection levels are given at Tables 2.7 and 2.8, with reference to each reliability class. Design supervision levels DSL3 relating to RC3 DSL2 relating to RC2 DSL1 relating to RC1 Table 2.7. Design supervision levels (DSL) [Table (B4)-EN1990] Characteristics Extended supervision Normal supervision Normal supervision Minimum recommended requirements for checking of calculations, drawings and specifications Checking performed by an organisation different from that which has prepared the design Checking by different persons than those originally responsible and in accordance with the procedure of the organisation. Self-checking: checking performed by the person who has prepared the design Table 2.8. Inspection levels (IL) [Table (B5)-EN1990] Inspection levels Characteristics Requirements IL3 relating torc3 Extended inspection Third party inspection IL2 relating to RC2 Normal inspection Inspection in accordance with the procedures of the organisation IL1 relating to RC1 Normal inspection Self inspection Design with partial factors given in EC2 and with the partial factors given in the EN1990 annexes results in a structure associated with the RC2 reliability class. 2.2 Principles of limit state design C2.2 Principles of limit state design Eurocodes adopt the partial factors method, or limit states semi-probabilistic method, as the method for the verification of structural safety. EC2 point 2.2 refers to EN1990 Section 3 for limit state design rules. These are here repeated, partially repeating the description of the three safety verification methods in Par Design for limit states shall be based on the use of structural and load models for relevant limit states. It shall be verified that no limit state is exceeded when relevant design values for actions, material and product properties and geometrical data are used in these models. The verifications shall be carried out for all relevant design situations and load cases. Two categories are defined by the consequences associated with the attainment of a limit state: ultimate limit state and serviceability limit state. Verification shall be carried out against both categories; verification of one of the two categories may be omitted only if it can be proven that it is satisfied by the verification of the other one. The ultimate limit states are associated with loss of equilibrium of the whole structure, or failure or excessive deformation of a structural member and they generally concern safety of people. For the verification of ultimate limit state design actions shall not exceed the design resistance of the structure. Table 2.9 shows the ULS classification according to EN1990 [(EN1990 point (6.4.1)]. Notation EQU STR GEO FAT Table 2.9. ULS classification Definition Loss of static equilibrium of the structure or any part of it considered as a rigid body, where : minor variations in the value or the spatial distribution of actions from a single source are significant (e.g. self-weight variations) the strengths of construction materials or ground are generally not governing Internal failure or excessive deformation of the structure or structural members, including footings, piles, basement walls, etc., where the strength of construction materials of the structure governs Failure or excessive deformation of the ground where the strengths of soil or rock are significant in providing resistance Fatigue failure of the structure or structural members. Page 2-5

21 Guide to EC2 Section 2 Serviceability limit states correspond to conditions beyond which specified service requirements for a structure or structural member are no longer met. Exceeding these limits causes limited damage but means that the structures do not meet design requirements: functional requirements (not only of the structure, but also of machines and services), comfort of users, appearance (where the term appearance is concerned with high deformation, extensive cracking, etc.), damage to finishes and to non-structural members. Usually the serviceability requirements are agreed for each individual project. EN1990 indicates three different types of combinations for serviceability limit states verifications: characteristic combination (called rare combination in the previous versions of Eurocodes), frequent combination and quasi-permanent combination. The choice of combinations to be taken into account is related to the distinction between reversible and irreversible limit states: frequent and quasi-permanent combinations apply to the first case, characteristic combinations to the second case. The definition of relevant limit states for a certain construction requires above all the analysis of the different situations to which it can be exposed. The situations chosen for design shall cover all situations that can reasonably occur during the execution and working life of the structure. In common cases, design situations are classified as: persistent design situations, referring to conditions of normal use; transient situations, referring to temporary conditions of the structure, e.g. during construction or repair; accidental situations, involving exceptional conditions of the structure or its exposure, including fire, explosion, impact, etc.; seismic situations, where the structure is subjected to a seismic event. 2.3 Basic variables Actions and environmental influences Each design situation is characterized by the presence of several types of actions on the structure. Action means, as EN1990 states, either a set of forces (loads) applied to the structure (direct actions), or a set of imposed deformations or accelerations caused for example, by temperature changes, moisture variation, uneven settlement or earthquakes (indirect action). Actions are classified as: permanent actions (G), the duration of which is continuous and equal to the design working life of the structure, or for which the variation in magnitude with time is negligible (e.g. selfweight). Those actions, like prestressing or concrete shrinkage, for which the variation is always in the same direction (monotonic) until the action attains a certain limit value, are also permanent actions; variable actions (Q), divided in variable actions with discrete and regular occurrence in time (e.g. imposed load of people and low-duration imposed load in general on building floors); and variable actions characterized by variable and non-monotonic intensity or direction (e.g. snow, wind, temperature, waves); accidental actions (A), which are not easily foreseeable and of low duration (e.g. explosions, impacts, fire). Each permanent action with low variability has a single characteristic value G k. This is the case of actions due to self-weight: they are generally represented through a nominal value calculated on the basis of the design drawings (structural and non-structural member dimensions) and of the average specific gravity of materials (G k = G m). If a permanent action has relevant uncertainties (coefficient of variation bigger than 10%, where the coefficient of variation is the ratio between standard deviation and average) and if sufficient statistical information is available, two characteristic values (upper, G k,sup, and lower, G k,inf) should be used. G k,sup is the 95% fractile and G k,inf is the 5% fractile of the statistical distribution for G, which may be assumed to be Gaussian. There is a 5% probability that these two values will be exceeded, the probability that the real value of action is more than G k,sup or less than G k,inf is less than 5% (fig. 2.2). Figure 2.2. Characteristic value of a permanent action: Gk = Gm if the coefficient of variation is negligible; a lower and an upper characteristic value Gk,inf and Gk,sup are defined if the coefficient of variation is high Page 2-6

22 Guide to EC2 Section 2 Each variable action has four representative values. The main representative value of a variable action is its characteristic value Q k; the other representative values are, in decreasing order: the combination value, represented as a product 0 Q k, the frequent value, represented as a product 1 Q k, the quasi-permanent value, represented as a product 2 Q k. For simplicity, each of these last three values is defined as a fraction of the characteristic value, obtained by applying a reducing factor to Q k. In reality, the frequent value and the quasi-permanent value are inherent properties of the variable action, and the 1 and 2 factors are simply the ratios between these values and the characteristic value. On the other hand, the 0 factor, called the combination factor, determines the level of intensity of a variable action when this action is taken into account, in design, simultaneously with another variable action, called leading variable action, which is taken into account by its characteristic value. The 0 factor takes therefore into account the low probability of simultaneous occurrence of the most unfavourable values of independent variable actions. It is used both for ULS verifications and for irreversible SLS verifications. The frequent ( 1 Q k) and the quasi-permanent ( 2 Q k) values are used for ULS verifications including accidental actions and for reversible serviceability limit states. Values of factors for buildings are defined in the National Annex. Table 2.10 shows the values recommended by EN1990. The characteristic value of a variable action has a defined probability, beforehand accepted, of being exceeded on the unfavourable side within a fixed reference period. This period is normally coincident with the design working life of the structure. For the majority of climatic variable actions, as well as for service loads on building floors, the characteristic value is based upon the probability of 0,02 of its time-varying part being exceeded within a reference period of one year. In other words, this is equivalent to a mean return period of 50 years. Table Recommended values of factors for buildings [Table (A1.1)-EN1990] Imposed loads in buildings, category (see EN ) Category A: domestic, residential areas 0,7 0,5 0,3 Category B: office areas 0,7 0,5 0,3 Category C: congregation areas 0,7 0,7 0,6 Category D: shopping areas 0,7 0,7 0,6 Category E: storage areas 1,0 0,9 0,8 Category F: traffic area, vehicle weight 30 kn 0,7 0,7 0,6 Category G: traffic area, 30 kn < vehicle weight 160 kn 0,7 0,5 0,3 Category H: roofs Snow loads on buildings (see EN )* in Finland, Iceland, Norway, Sweden and other CEN Member, for sites located at altitude H > 1000 m a.s.l. 0,7 0,5 0,2 Other CEN Member States, for sites located at altitude H < 1000 m a.s.l. 0,5 0,2 0 Wind load on buildings (see EN ) 0,6 0,2 0 Temperature (non-fire) in buildings (see EN ) 0,6 0,5 0 NOTE The values may be set by the National annex. * For countries not mentioned below, see relevant local conditions. The characteristic value of seismic action for ULS verification is fixed by Eurocode 8 (EN1998), based on a return period of 475 years, corresponding to a probability of 10% of being exceeded in 50 years. It is possible to modify the return period by means of an importance factor I. The frequent value and the quasi-permanent value of floor loads on building are determined so that the average periods of time within which they are exceeded are respectively 10% (ratios of the sum of intercepts of time BC, DE, FG, HI and the reference period of 50 years represented by segment AJ in Fig. 2.3) and 50% (ratio of listed segments and segment AJ). Figure 2.3 resumes the representative values of variable actions. Page 2-7

23 Guide to EC2 Section 2 Figure 2.3. Schematic illustration of representative values of variable actions For accidental actions, a single nominal value is determined because, due to the nature of these actions, sufficient information for the appropriate application of statistical methods is not available. In order to take into account the uncertainties on the choice of characteristic values for actions and some uncertainties concerning the action modelling, design does not use characteristic values, but amplified values, called design values, which are obtained by multiplying characteristic values by a partial factor. Symbols representing the design values are indicated with index d. Table 2.11 shows the steps to pass from the representative values of actions to the design values of their effects on construction. F d,i Table Procedure to determine the design values of effects on structures starting from the representative values of actions Expression Comment F Actions on the structure are identified i F k,i o where F k,i,, f,ifk,i o f,i F k,i where,, E =E F ;a d f,i k,i d E = E F ;a d Sd f,i k,i d E =E F ;a d F,i k,i d Representative values are assigned to actions: characteristic values or other (combination, frequent, quasi-permanent) values. Design values of actions are determined by multiplying the representative values F k,i or F k,i (where 0, 1,2 ) by a partial factor f,i. f,i is a partial factor generally covering the uncertainties related to the choice of characteristic values for actions and, sometimes, part of the uncertainties related to action modelling. In case of permanent actions, when it is necessary to split the action into a favourable and an unfavourable part, two different partial factors, indicated as G,sup and G,inf, are used. Actions that can occur simultaneously are considered; combinations of actions are calculated and the effects of these combinations on the structure are assessed (e.g. action effect in a cross section). a d represents either the design value of the set of geometrical data (in general, values indicated on the design drawings) or data that take into account the possibility of geometrical imperfection liable to cause second order effects. The design value of effects is obtained by multiplying the values produced by the design actions, by a partial factor Sd mainly covering the uncertainties of the structural model. In normal cases, the previous expression is simplified in this one, where: F,i =f (Sd, f,i) so that the model coefficient Sd does not explicitly appear. The product: F d,i = F,i Fk,i or F,i F; k,i 0, 1,2is often directly assumed as the design value of the action F k,i. Page 2-8

24 Guide to EC2 Section 1 Page 1-4

25 Guide to EC2 Section Thermal effects Differential settlements/movements Prestress Material and product properties General Several material properties are involved in structural design. The main one is strength, i.e. the ability to resist forces without breaking or failing. Strength of materials is represented through a characteristic value, indicated as f k. This is the value that has a given probability of not being attained or exceeded during a hypothetical unlimited test series. Eurocode EN1990 defines the characteristic value of a property of a material as the 5% fractile of its statistical distribution where a minimum value of the property is the nominal failure limit (general case), and as the 95% fractile where a maximum value is the limiting value. For the structural stiffness parameters (moduli of elasticity, creep coefficient, thermal expansion coefficient, etc.), the characteristic value is taken as a mean value because, depending on the case, these parameters can be favourable or unfavourable. Product properties are also represented by a single characteristic value or a set of characteristic values, according to their constituent materials. Table 2.12 shows the steps to pass from the characteristic values of individual material strengths or product resistances to the design values of structural resistance. Table 2.13 gives the values of partial safety factors to be assumed for concrete and steel for ULS, in case of persistent, transient and accidental load combinations. Table Procedure to determine the design values of resistances starting from the characteristic values of strength Expression Comment X Material strengths and product resistances involved in the i verifications are identified. X Characteristic values of material strengths and product resistances k,i are introduced. The design value of a material property is determined on the basis of its characteristic value, through the two following operations: X a) divide by a partial factor m, to take into account unfavourable k,i Xd,i uncertainties on the characteristic of this property, as well as any m,i local defaults.; b) multiply, if applicable, by a conversion factor mainly aimed at taking into account scale effects. X Determine the structural resistance on the basis of design values of k,i R ;a d individual material properties and of geometrical data. m,i Following a procedure similar to the one for calculating the design value of action effects, the design value of structural resistance is 1 X k,i determined on the basis of individual material properties and of Rd R ;ad Rd m,i geometrical data multiplied by a partial factor Rd that covers the model uncertainties of resistance and the geometrical data variations, if these are not explicitly taken into account in the model. X As for the action effects, factor Rd is often integrated in the global k,i Rd R ;a d safety factor M,i, by which the characteristic material strength is M,i divided: M,i f( Rd, m,i ). Fig. 2.4 summarise in a schematic way the relation between the single partial factors used in Eurocodes. Figure 2.4. Relation between the single partial factors [Fig. (C3) - EN1990] Page 2-9

26 Guide to EC2 Section Shrinkage and creep Deformations of concrete Geometric data General Supplementary requirements for cast in place piles 2.4 Verification by the partial factor method General Design values Partial factor for shrinkage action Partial factors for prestress Partial factor for fatigue loads Partial factors for materials Table Partial factors for concrete and steel for ultimate limit states [Table (2.1N)-EC2] Design situations C for concrete S for reinforcing steel S for prestressing steel Persistent and transient 1,5 1,15 1,15 Accidental 1,2 1,0 1,0 The values of partial factors given in the previous table were determined as: = exp 3,04V -1,64 V M R f where: V = V + V + V R m G f V R V m V G V f coefficient of variation of resistance coefficient of variation of model uncertainty coefficient of variation of geometrical factor coefficient of variation of material strength The basic values in EC2 may be considered to be based on the following assumptions: For reinforcement model uncertainty V m = 2,5 % geometry V G = 5 % steel strength V f = 4 % For these values the equation gives M = s = 1,154 For concrete Variation of model uncertainty 5 % Variation of geometry 5 % Variation of concrete strength 15 % For these values the equation gives M = c = 1,30. Assuming an additional factor 1,15 to cover the uncertainty arising from the concrete being tested with test specimens specially made and cured for this purpose, rather than from the finished structure, the result is c = 1,15 1,30 = 1,50. For serviceability limit states values of partial safety factors C and S are defined in the National Annex. The recommended value for situations not covered by specific parts of EC2 is 1,0. Besides the partial safety factors for materials above, EC2 also defines partial factors for shrinkage, prestressing, fatigue loads and materials for foundations. These values are also defined in the National Annex. The table below gives the values recommended in EC2. Page 2-10

27 Guide to EC2 Section Partial factors for materials for foundations Table Recommended values of partial safety factors Shrinkage (e.g. for ULS verification of stability when second order effects are relevant) SH 1,0 favourable in persistent and transient situations P,fav 1,0 Prestressing Stability ULS with external prestressing if an increase of P,unfav 1,3 prestressing may be unfavourable local effects P,unfav 1,2 Fatigue F,fat 1,0 Materials for foundations (amplified in order to obtain the design resistance of cast in place piles without permanent scaffolding) C,fond 1,1 C Combinations of actions The general formats for the ULS and SLS combinations of actions, as defined in EN 1990 Section 6, are given below. It has to be pointed out that the combinations foreseen in EN 1990 cover static actions only, but there is no consideration of actions of dynamic type, such as actions caused by vibrating machinery (turbines, compressors, etc.). It has also to be noted that EN 1990 considers the zero value a possible value of the partial factor of variable actions Q, although Q = 0 has no probabilistic meaning. A zero value of Q is therefore an expedient to remove from the combination of actions the favourable effect of variable actions (e.g. to maximize the positive bending moment in the central span of a three-span continuous beam, the variable imposed load shall be applied on the central span only, which is equivalent to setting Q = 0 in the two lateral spans, see Example 2.1). ULS Combinations Three types of combinations of actions should be considered for Ultimate Limit States: fundamental, accidental and seismic. Combinations of actions for persistent or transient design situations (fundamental combinations): j1 G P Q Q G, j k, j P Q,1 k,1 Q,i 0,i k,i i1 or alternatively for the STR and GEO limit states, the more unfavourable of the two following expressions: j1 j1 where G P Q Q G, j k, j P Q,1 0,1 k,1 Q,i 0,i k,i i1 G P Q Q j G, j k, j P Q,1 k,1 Q,i 0,i k,i i1 i are reduction factors for the unfavourable permanent actions G. EN1990 introduces then the possibility to choose for the fundamental combination: 1. the traditional expression with a predominant variable action Q k,1 and the permanent actions (including prestressing P) introduced with its characteristic value, other concomitant variable actions introduced with their combination values; 2. or a system of two expressions, the most unfavourable of which should be adopted by the designer; these expressions are obtained by reducing the multiplying factor of the predominant variable action (through the 0 factor) in the first case, or by reducing the multiplying factors for permanent unfavourable actions (through the factor that is in the range 0,85 1,00). The expression to be used for the fundamental combination is chosen in the National Annex. Combinations of actions for accidental design situations G PA ( or )Q Q k, j d 1,1 2,1 k,1 2,i k,i j1 i1 where A d is the accidental design action (for fire situations, it represents the design value of the indirect thermal action due to fire). Page 2-11

28 Guide to EC2 Section 2 If a variable action may be present on the structure at the moment when the accidental action occurs, its frequent value ( 1,1 Q k,1) will be used in the combination, otherwise its quasi-permanent value ( 2,1 Q k,1) will be used; other variable actions are introduced in the combination with their quasi-permanent values ( 2,i Q k,i). Combinations of actions for seismic design situations j1 G PA Q k, j Ed 2,i k,i i1 where A Ed is the design value of seismic action ( A Ed = I AEk with I importance factor and A Ek characteristic values of seismic action - see EN1998). Note that the seismic action is combined with the quasi-permanent value of variable actions, whereas permanent actions G k,j are taken into account with their characteristic value, and prestressing with its representative value (see ch. 6). SLS combinations There are three combinations of actions for SLS: characteristic, frequent and quasi-permanent. Characteristic combination G PQ Q j1 k, j k,1 0,i k,i i1 Frequent combination: G P Q Q j1 k, j 1,1 k,1 2,i k,i i1 Quasi-permanent combination: G P Q j1 k, j 2,i k,i i1 Detailed expressions of the combinations of actions are given in the normative annexes to EN 1990 (Annex A1 for buildings, A2 for bridges, etc.), together with the recommended values of partial safety factors F and of combination factors. The characteristic combination should be normally considered for short term limit states, associated with the one-time attainment of a fixed value of the effect considered (e.g. crack formation). It corresponds to those effects that have a probability of being exceeded which is close to the probability that the characteristic value of the predominant variable action Q k,1 will be exceeded. In other words, the characteristic combination should be considered for verification of irreversible serviceability limit states: e.g. the crack width limit state characterized by a 0,5 mm crack width is an irreversible limit state, because such a wide crack cannot completely close once the action that produced it is removed. The frequent combination should be considered for long term limit states, associated with the attainment of a fixed value of the effect considered for a small fraction of the reference period or for its attainment a fixed number of times. It corresponds to those effects that are exceeded with a frequency or length of time close to the one of the frequent value 1 Q k,1 of the predominant variable action (e.g. the crack width limit state of a prestressed concrete beam with bonded tendons, XC2 exposure class, with design crack width not exceeding 0,2 mm). The quasi-permanent combination should be considered for long term action effects, associated with the attainment of a fixed value of these limit states for a long fraction of the reference period (e.g. the crack width limit state for a reinforced concrete or prestressed concrete beam with unbonded tendons, with design crack width not exceeding 0,3 mm). Frequent and quasi-permanent combinations must be considered for the verification of reversible limit states, i.e. limit states that will not be attained or exceeded once the actions that have caused attainment or exceeding are removed. Combination of actions for fatigue limit state The combination of actions for fatigue verification is given in [(6.8.3)-EC2]: Gk, j P1,1Qk,1 2,iQk,i Qfat j1 i1 where Q is the relevant fatigue load (e.g. traffic load or other cyclic load). fat Page 2-12

29 Guide to EC2 Section Combinations of actions for the ultimate limit states verification of a building EN1990 Annex A1 gives rules for combinations of actions for buildings, on the basis of symbolic expressions and recommended values (or of values given in the National Annex) of partial factors to be applied to actions in the combinations. Eurocodes allow combinations of actions to contain two or more variable actions. In general, for ultimate limit states, values of partial factors are subdivided in three sets (A, B and C), given in Tables [A1.2(A)-EN1990] to [A1.2(C)-EN1990], which are combined in the following table. Actions Table Sets A, B and C of partial factors for actions Permanent Predominant actions G k variable action Unfavourable Favourable Q k,1 (Note 2) Non predominant variable actions Q k,i (Note 2) Set A 1,10 0,90 1,5 1,5 (eq.6.10)- 1,35 1,00 1,5 EN1990 1,5 or alternatively the most unfavourable between the two following: Set B (eq.6.10a)- (Note 1) 1,35 1,00 1,5 EN1990 1,5 (eq.6.10b)- 0,85 1,35 1,00 1,5 1,5 EN1990 Set C 1,00 1,00 1,30 1,30 Note 1: eq.6.10 or alternatively the most unfavourable between eq.6.10a and eq.6.10b is used. The choice is made in the National Annex. In case of 6.10a and 6.10b, the National annex may in addition modify 6.10a to include permanent actions only. Note 2: The partial factor of favourable variable actions should be taken as 0. Depending on the limit state under consideration, values from one or more sets should be used, as indicated in the following table. Table Sets of partial factors to be used for ULS Limit state Set of partial factors to be used EQU Static equilibrium Set A STR Design of structural members not involving geotechnical actions Set B STR Design of structural members involving geotechnical actions (foundations, piles, basement walls, etc.) GEO Breaking or excessive deformation of ground Approach 1(*): Apply in separate calculations design values from Set B and Set C to all actions. In common cases, the sizing of foundations is governed by Set C and the structural resistance is governed by Approach 2: Apply Set B to all actions Approach 3: Simultaneously apply, in the same calculation, Set B to actions on the structure and Set C to geotechnical actions (*) The choice of approach to be used for STR/GEO verification is given in the National Annex. Combinations obtained with sets A, B and C of partial factors with EN 1990 recommended values are given below. Note that the partial factor of variable actions should be taken as 0 where these actions are favourable. Combinations of actions with Set A of partial factors (EQU) j1 1,1G 0,9G 1,5Q 1,5 Q kj,sup kj,inf k,1 0,i k,i i1 In this combination the favourable part of a same action is multiplied by 0,9 and the unfavourable by 1,1. For example, in the verification of holding down devices for the uplift of bearings of a continuous beam, the self weight of spans that give a stabilising effect should be multiplied by 0,9 whereas the self weight of spans that give destabilising effect should be multiplied by 1,1 (see Example 2.1). Page 2-13

30 Guide to EC2 Section 2 Combinations of actions with Set B of partial factors (STR/GEO) Either 1,35Gkj,sup 1,0Gkj,inf 1,5Qk,1 1,50,iQk,i [eq. (6.10)-EN1990] j1 (where i1 G kj,sup are unfavourable permanent loads and G kj,inf are favourable permanent loads) or the less favourable of the two following expressions: 1,35Gkj,sup 1,0Gkj,inf 1,501Qk,1 1,50,iQk,i j1 i1 [eq. (6.10a)-EN1990] 1,15Gkj,sup 1,0Gkj,inf 1,5Qk,1 1,50,iQk,i [eq. (6.10b)-EN1990] j1 i1 The National Annex decides whether eq. [(6.10)-EN1990] or the less favourable of [(6.10a)- EN1990] and [(6.10b)-EN1990] should be considered. In these expressions G kj,sup (G kj,inf) is a set of permanent actions from one source with an unfavourable (or favourable) resulting effect of the total action. For example, all actions originating from the self weight of the structure may be considered as coming from one source; this also applies if different materials are involved. Therefore in the verifications of resistance of the sections of a beam, its self weight should be taken with the same design value for the whole length of the beam ( G = 1,35), whereas a different value of partial factor ( G = 1,0) can be taken for permanent loads originating from a different source. Combinations of actions with Set C of partial factors (STR/GEO) Verification of static equilibrium - EQU j1 1,0G 1,0G 1,3Q 1,3 Q kj,sup kj,inf k,1 0,i k,i i1 2.5 Design assisted by testing 2.6 Supplementary requirements for foundations 2.7 Requirements for fastenings See examples 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5 Page 2-14

31 Guide to EC2 Section 3 SECTION 3 MATERIALS SECTION 3. MATERIALS Section 3 of Eurocode 2, dedicated to materials, is structured in the following paragraphs: 3.1 Concrete 3.2 Reinforcing steel. Annex C-EC2 is related to this paragraph 3.3 Prestressing steel 3.1 Concrete General C3.1.1 General This section deals with normal weight concrete, viz. according to EN having density greater than 2000 but not exceeding 2600 kg/m 3. Light-weight concrete is dealt with in Sect.11 EC Strength C3.1.2 Strength Compressive strength is defined in [3.1.2(1)P-EC2], in accordance with EN 206-1, by the characteristic value f ck (5% fractile of distribution) obtained through the elaboration of compression tests executed at 28 days on cylindrical specimens of diameter 150 mm and height 150 mm. As in many countries testing is carried out on 150 mm cubic specimens, EN admits f ck,cube compressive strength, too. Compressive strength classes are denoted by letter C followed by two numbers that indicate the cylinder and cube characteristic strength, expressed in N/mm 2, for example C30/37. EC2 contemplates 14 classes: from C12/15 to C90/105. Table [3.1-EC2] gives the numeric values of strength and deformation characteristics associated with strength classes and the analytic relationship expressing such values in function of f ck. Average values of compressive strength f cm, of tensile strength f ctm and of elasticity modulus E cm are plotted in Fig. 3.1 in function of f ck. E cm is denoted by the inclination of the line secant of the - relation between points = 0 and = 0,4 f cm as indicated in [Fig. 3.2-EC2]. Clause [3.1.2(6)-EC2] deals with the development of compressive strength with time. Formula [(3.2)- EC2] allows to calculate the average strength f cm at a time t (days) in function of the value at 28 days, which can be deduced from Table [3.1-EC2] and from the class of cement used. Cement classes conforming to EN 197 are: Class R (rapid hardening), including CEM 42,5R, CEM 52,5N and CEM 52,5R Class N (normal hardening) including CEM 42,5N and CEM 32,5R Class S (slow hardening) including CEM 32,5N. Table 2.1 shows the development until 360 days of average strength f cm of concrete produced with cement from the three classes, where the compressive strength at 28 days for each class, f cm, equals 1. Figure 3.1. Values of fcm, fctm and Ecm in function of fck Table 3.1. Development of fcm(t) / fcm,28 ratio t (days) Class R Class N Class S 1 0,42 0,34 0,19 2 0,58 0,50 0,35 3 0,66 0,60 0,46 7 0,82 0,78 0, ,92 0,90 0, ,00 1,00 1, ,09 1,11 1, ,15 1,19 1,31 Page 3-1

32 Guide to EC2 Section Elastic deformation C3.1.3 Elastic deformation Clause [3.1.3-EC2] deals with the elastic deformation represented by the values of the modulus of elasticity E cm. Note that the numerical values in Table [3.1-EC2] and here given in Fig 3.1 are referred to concrete produced with siliceous aggregate, at 28 days of curing. These values should be reduced, for concrete with limestone and sandstone aggregates, respectively by 10% and by 30%. For basaltic aggregates they should be increased by 10%. The development of the E-modulus with time is deduced from the one of f cm (Table 3.1) with formula [(3.5)-EC2]. Table 3.2 shows the development of E cm up to 360 days as a ratio of E cm at 28 days. Table 3.2. Development of modulus of elasticity Ecm with time t (days) Class R Class N Class S 3 0,88 0,86 0,80 7 0,94 0,93 0, ,97 0,96 0, ,00 1,00 1, ,02 1,03 1, ,04 1,05 1, Creep and shrinkage (1-5) (6) Page 3-2 C3.1.4 Creep and shrinkage Clause [3.1.4-EC2] is about creep and shrinkage. These two phenomena are typical of concrete. The first relates to the increase in the deformation with time in presence of permanent actions, the second is a spontaneous variation of volume. The development of both phenomena depends on the ambient humidity, the dimensions of the element and the composition of the concrete. Creep is also influenced by the maturity of the concrete when the load is first applied and depends on the duration and magnitude of the loading. C3.1.4 (1-5) The creep deformation of concrete cc(,t o) at time t = for a constant compressive stress c applied at the concrete age t 0, is given by: c cc,t 0,t0 Ec [(3.6)-EC2] (2.1) where (, t 0) is the creep coefficient related to E c, the tangent modulus, which may be taken as 1,05 E cm as from Table [3.1-EC2]. Annex B of the Eurocode gives detailed information on the development of creep with time. Where great accuracy is not required, the value found from Figure 3.1 may be considered as the creep coefficient, provided that the concrete is not subjected to a compressive stress greater than 0,45f ck(t 0) at an age t 0. The values given in Figure 3.1 are valid for ambient temperatures between -40 C and +40 C and a mean relative humidity between RH = 40% and RH = 100%. Moreover, graphs are in function of the concrete t 0, expressed in days, at the time of loading, of the notional size h o = 2A c/u where A c is the concrete cross-sectional area and u is the perimeter of that part which is exposed to drying. They are also in function of the concrete class (e.g. C30/37) and of the class (R, N, S) of cement used, as detailed at clause [3.1.2(6)-EC2]. When the compressive stress of concrete at an age t 0 exceeds the value 0,45 f ck(t 0) then the proportionality expressed by [(3.1)-EC2] does not subsist and creep non-linearity should be considered. In such cases the non-linear notional creep coefficient should be obtained as from the exponential expression [(3.7)-EC2]. C3.1.4 (6) The total shrinkage strain cs is composed of two components: cd, the drying shrinkage strain, which develops slowly, since it is a function of the migration of the water through the hardened concrete and ca, the autogenous shrinkage strain, which develops during hardening of the concrete: the major part of it therefore develops in the early days after casting. Autogenous shrinkage can be defined as the macroscopic volume reduction of cementitious materials when cement hydrates after initial setting. Autogenous shrinkage does not include the volume change due to loss or ingress of substances, temperature variation, the application of an external force and restraint [JCI, 1998]. Autogenous shrinkage specially has to be regarded for higher strength concrete s, since its value increases with decreasing water cement ratio. Autogenous shrinkage is negligible, in comparison to drying shrinkage, in concrete having a w/c ratio greater than 0.45, but it can represent 50% of the total shrinkage when w/c is Its development in time is linked to the hardening process of the concrete. In high strength concrete there is a considerable strength development during the first days; therefore autogenous shrinkage specially has to be regarded in cases that imposed deformations can occur, such as in the case that new concrete is cast against old concrete. In Annex B of EC-2 the basic equations for both drying shrinkage and autogenous shrinkage are given. They are valid up to a concrete strength class C90.

33 Guide to EC2 Section 3 Drying shrinkage is essentially a function of the ambient humidity and of the notional size h o = 2A c/u. Clause [3.1.4(6)-EC2] gives formulae and tabled values normally used. Further information is given in Annex B (part B2). 0 Shrinkage according to EN ,5R tcure=1d - RH=65% h 0 =150mm Shrinkage [µs] C12/15 C20/25 C25/30 C30/37 C35/45 C40/50 C45/55 C50/60 C70/85 C90/ Age [days] Figure 3.2. Development of shrinkage according to EC2 C90/105 C12/ Stress-strain relation for non-linear structural analysis C3.1.5 Stress-strain relation for non-linear structural analysis Clause [3.1.5-EC2] gives the stress-strain relation for non-linear structural analysis as described by [Fig. 3.2-EC2] and by the expression [(3.14)-EC2]. In the ENV the following relation has been used in order to describe the mean stress strain relation: 2 c - = (1) fcm where = c / c1 (2) c1 = (strain at peak compressive stress) k = (1.1 E c) c1/f c (3) E c denotes the mean value E cm of the longitudinal modulus of deformation, where E cm = (f ck + 8) 1/3 (4) In ENV , however, only concrete strength classes up to C50/60 were considered. High strength concrete is known to behave in a more brittle way and the formulation therefore cannot be extended to high strength concrete without modification. Fig. 3.2 shows compressive stress strain relations for concrete strength classes ranging from about C25 to C90 Figure 3.2 Stress-strain relation for concrete s different strength classes subjected to a constant strain rate (strain in horizontal axis in, stress in vertical axis in MPa) Page 3-3

34 Guide to EC2 Section 3 In [CEB, 1995], the following modifications have been proposed: Eq. (4) overestimates the E-modulus for HSC. An appropriate formulation for HSC is: E cm = [(f ck + f) / 10] 0.3 (5) where the difference between mean and characteristic strength f is 8 MPa. This equation is also a good approximation for the E-modulus of normal strength concrete and could therefore be attributed general validity. (It should be noted that the given values are mean values and that the real modulus of elasticity can considerably be influenced by a component like the aggregate. If the modulus of elasticity is important and results from similar types of concrete are not known, testing of the concrete considered is recommended). To determine the ascending branch, using Eq. 1, the constant value c1 = should for HSC be replaced by c1 ( )= f cm 0.31 (f cm in MPa) (6) This value can as well be used for normal strength concrete For HSC (>C50) the descending branch should be formulated by c = f cm / [1 + {( 1-1) / ( 2 1)} 2 ] (7) where 1 = c / c1 and 2 = ( c1 + c0) / c1 where c0 is a value to be taken from Table 3.3. Table 3.3.The parameter t for HSC fck (MPa) c0 (10-3 ) A warning is given that the descending branch highly depends on the testing procedure and its formulation should be used with caution. Using the relations (1,2,3,5,6,7) the diagram shown in Fig. 3.3 is obtained. Since the descending branch for HSC is not very reliable, a simplified formulation is preferred, in that the lines according to Eq. (1) are continued beyond the top, Eq. 6, until a defined value cu is reached, according to cu ( ) = [(98 f cm)/100] 4 for f ck 55 Mpa (8) In this way the simplified curves shown in Fig. 3.4 may be obtained. Figure 3.3. Mean stress-strain relations, obtained by combining Eq. (1-3) and (5-7). Page 3-4

35 Guide to EC2 Section 3 Figure 3.4. Simplified mean stress-strain relations, according to the new formulation, combining Eq. (5,6,8) Design compressive and tensile strengths C3.1.6 Design compressive and tensile strengths The value of the design compressive strength f cd is defined as f cd = cc f ck / C [(3.15)-EC2] (2.2) where cc is the coefficient taking account of long term effects on the compressive strength and of unfavourable effects resulting from the way the load is applied; C is the partial safety factor for concrete, which is 1,50 [Table 2.1N-EC2]. A well known research program focussing on the effects of long term loading was the one carried out by Rüsch [Rüsch, 1960]. He carried out tests on concrete prisms, which he loaded to a certain fraction of the short-term compressive strength: subsequently the load was kept constant for a long period. If the long-term loads were higher than about 80% of the short-term bearing capacity, failure occurred after a certain period. Fig. 3.5 reproduces Rüsch s diagrammatic representation of concrete strains as a function of the applied stresses for several loading times. Figure 3.5. Stress-strain relations for several time durations of axial compressive loads (Rüsch, 1960) As can be seen, the longer the loading time, the more the ultimate strength approaches the long-term value 80%. The tests carried out by Rüsch were limited to concrete s with a maximum cube strength of about 60Mpa. Tests by Walraven and Han on concrete s with cube strength s up to 100 Mpa showed that the sustained loading behaviour for high strength concrete is similar to that of conventional concrete s [Han/Walraven, 1993]. Page 3-5

36 Guide to EC2 Section 3 However, Rüsch s tests were carried out on concrete which had an age of 28 days at the time the load was applied. This condition will normally not hold for a structure in practice, which generally will be much older when subjected to a load. This means that the sustained loading effect is at least partially compensated by the increase in strength between 28 days and the age of loading. Fig. 3.6 shows the strength development in time according to eq. EC-3.3 for concrete s made with rapid hardening high strength cements RS, normal and rapid hardening cements N and R, and slowly hardening cements SL. Figure 3.6. Compressive strength development of concrete made with various types of cement according to Eq. EC-3-3 Fig 3.6 shows, that the gain in strength in 6 months ranges from 12% for rapid hardening cements to 25% for slowly hardening cements. So, a considerable part of the sustained loading effect is compensated for by the increase in strength. Furthermore the bearing capacity as formulated in building codes is generally based on experiments in laboratories (shear, punching, torsion, capacity of columns). Normally those tests have a duration of at least 1.5 hours. In Fig. 3.5 it can be seen that in a test with a loading duration of 100 minutes, the reduction of strength with regard to 2 minutes is already about 15%. A certain sustained loading effect is therefore already included in the results of tests. It is therefore concluded that cases in which the sustained loading effect will really influence the bearing capacity of a structure in practice are seldom and do not justify a general reduction of the design strength with a sustained loading factor of 0.8. Therefore in clause it is stated that the value of cc may be assumed to be 1, unless specified otherwise. Such a case can for instance occur when, according to 3.1.2, the concrete strength is determined substantially after 28 days: in such a case the gain in strength may be marginal so that a value cc smaller than 1 is more appropriate. For tension similar arguments apply. The value of the design tensile strength f ctd is defined as f ctd = ct f ctk 0,05 / C [(3.16)-EC2] (2.3) where ct is a safety factor, similar to cc, the value of which may be found in the National Annex; f ctk 0,05 is the characteristic axial tensile strength of concrete, fractile 5%, which can be deducted from Table [3.1-EC2] Stress-strain relations for the design of crosssections C3.1.7 Stress-strain relations for the design of cross-sections Design stress-strain relations can be derived from the mean stress strain relations. This can principally be done using the relations given in 3.1.5, but now for the characteristic compressive strength (f ck) values and subsequently reducing the stress ordinate by a factor c = 1.5. This means that principally not only the stress values but also the E c values are divided by c. In order to obtain consistent and sufficiently safe design relations the ultimate strains cu have also been slightly reduced in relation to Eq. 8. By choosing the expression cu ( ) = [(90 f ck)/100] 4 < 3.5 (9) for concrete strength classes C55 and higher, all curves end approximately at their top (compare Fig. 3.3). The resulting curves are shown in Fig Page 3-6

37 Guide to EC2 Section 3 - Figure 3.7. Basis for design diagrams In the new version for EC-2 two alternative design curves are given: one on the basis of a parabolarectangle relation (Fig. 3.8), and one on the basis of a bilinear relation (Fig. 3.9) Figure 3.8. Parabola-rectangle design stress-strain relation Figure 3.9. Design stress-strain curves for a parabola-rectangle formation The parabola rectangle relation (Fig. 3.8) is expressed by n c c f cd 11 for 0 c c2 cu c fcd for 2 where n, c2 and c2u follow from the table below: 0 c c u Table 3.4. Parameters for the parabola-rectangle design stress-strain relation in compression C20 C35 C50 C55 C60 C70 C80 C90 c2( ) 2,0 2,0 2,0 2,2 2,3 2,4 2,5 2,6 cu2( ) 3,5 3,5 3,5 3,1 2,9 2,7 2,6 2,6 n ,75 1,6 1,45 1,4 1,4 Page 3-7

38 Guide to EC2 Section 3 on the basis of the parabola rectangle approach and the bilinear approach. The figure shows that there is good overall consistency. It could be argued that for the lowest concrete strength classes (see the figure for C20 in Fig. 3.12), the bilinear approach is slightly less accurate. This could be improved by reducing the values c3 for the lower strength classes. This would however have a considerable disadvantage since then the shape of the design stress strain curves for all strength classes < C55 would be different which would render substantial complications for practical design (different shape factors and distance factors, large sets of design diagrams for various cases, where now only one diagram is sufficient). Since the loss of accuracy for practical calculations is very small the constant value c3 = 1.75 % should be maintained. Figure Comparison of basic and approximate design curves In clause (4) of EC2 as well the possibility is offered to work with a rectangular stress distribution, see fig. 12. This requires the introduction of a factor for the depth of the compression zone and a factor for the design strength, see Fig Figure Rectangular stress distribution As a basis for the derivation of and the parabolic-rectangle stress strain relation is used, see Fig As an example the values and are calculated for the strength classes C50 and lower. For concrete s in the strength classes C50 the characteristic strains are c2 = 2.0 and c2u = 3.5. Now a rectangular stress block is searched for, which gives the same resulting force at the same location. Figure Derivation of rectangular stress block from the parabolic-rectangle stress distribution for concrete strength class C50 Page 3-9

39 Guide to EC2 Section 3 For the parabolic-rectangle stress distribution the resulting force is 0.81 xbf cd and the distance of this force to the top is 0.415x, where x is the height of the compression area. In order to obtain a rectangular stress block with its resultant at the same position, the depth of the compression area should be x = 2*0.415x = 0.83x, so = In order to get the same magnitude of the resultant, the maximum stress is defined as f cd. The resultant force for the rectangular stress block is (x)b(f cd). Since this force should be equal to 0.83xbf cd, the value of follows from = 0.81/ = 0.98 Carrying out this calculation for all concrete strength classes, with the values for c3 and c3u taken from table 3.5 [table 3.1 EC2], the values and shown in fig are obtained. Figure Values and for the definition of the rectangular stress block Approximate equations for and are: 0,8 per f ck 50 N/mm f ck per 50 < f ck 70 N/mm 2 1 per f ck 50 N/mm 2 0,8-1, f ck per 50 < f ck 70 N/mm 2 If the width of the compression zone decreases in the direction of the extreme compression fibre, the values given in Eq. 16a,b do not hold. This is investigated in Fig Figure Derivation of rectangular stress block from bilinear stress block for a cross section width in the direction of the extreme compression fibre Similar type of calculations has been carried out for this case. Fig shows for an as a function of the concrete strength. Three cases are considered: - the calculated relations for a rectangular cross-section - the calculated relations for a triangular cross-section with the top at the extreme compressive strain - the design equation, derived for the case of the rectangular cross-section. It is shown that the design equation for is safe for both cases. However, the values for for the triangular case are lower than the design values. It is sufficient to reduce the values for with 10% in order to cover as well the triangular case. Page 3-10

40 Guide to EC2 Section 3 Figure Calculated values for and for a rectangular and triangular cross-section, in comparison with the design equation for the rectangular case Flexural tensile strength Confined concrete C3.1.8 Flexural tensile strength The flexural tensile strength is larger than the concentric tensile strength. This is caused by strain softening at cracking concrete. The size effect of concrete in bending is therefore the same as for concrete subjected to shear or punching (see f.i. Walraven, 1995), so that the size 200 factor k 1 may be expected to apply for the relation between flexural tensile strength and d concentric tensile strength as well. However, in this case the phenomenon is more sensitive to the effect of drying shrinkage, temperature gradients and imposed deformations. Therefore the more conservative equation h f, 1,6 f f ctm fl 100 ctm ctm has been chosen. C3.1.9 Confined concrete Having a uniform radial compressive stresses 2 at the ULS as a result of confinement, the axial strength f ck,c is: f ck,c = f ck [1+5,000 ( 2 /f ck)] for 2 0,05 f ck [(3.24)-EC2] (2.4) f ck,c = f ck [1, ,5 ( 2 /f ck)] for 2 > 0,05 f ck [(3.25)-EC2] (2.5) Axial strength increases by 50% if the lateral compressive stresses are 15% of f ck, it doubles if compressive stresses are 35% of f ck. Also the strain at failure increase up to 3-4 times. Lateral stresses may be achieved by confinement of the compressed member. Index c after f ck, stands for "confined". 3.2 Reinforcing steel General Properties Strength C3.2.2 Properties Clause [3.2.2(3P)-EC2] states that the design rules of Eurocode are valid when steel having characteristic yield f yk between 400 and 600 N/mm 2 is used Ductility characteristics Welding Fatigue Page 3-11

41 Guide to EC2 Section Design assumptions C3.2.7 Design assumptions Safety factor S for ultimate limit states is 1,15 according to Table [2.1N-EC2]. The design stress-strain diagram is shown in Fig Figure Idealised and design stress-strain diagrams for reinforcing steel [Fig. 3.8-EC2] For normal design, either of the following assumptions may be made: f yk f t c) an inclined top branch with a strain limit of ud and a maximum stress of k where k= S f y d) a horizontal top branch without the need to check the strain limit. The recommended value of ud is 0,9 uk. f t The value of, given in Annex C for class C steel, is between 1,15 and 1,35. f y k The value of the elasticity modulus E s may be taken as Nmm -2. k 3.3 Prestressing steel General Properties Strength Ductility characteristics C3.3 Prestressing steel Data from EC2, integrated with those from EN which is referred to in EC2, are recalled hereafter. Prestressing steel are geometrically classified as: wires with plain or indented surface, of diameter between 3,0 and 11,0 mm two-wire strands spun together over a theoretical common axis; nominal diameter of the strand between 4,5 and 5,6 mm three-wire strands spun together over a theoretical common axis; nominal diameter of the strand between 5,2 and 7,7 mm seven-wire strands of which a straight core wire around which are spun six wires in one layer; nominal diameter of the strand between 6,4 and 18,0 mm ribbed bars; nominal diameter between 15,0 and 50,0 mm. Within each type, reinforcing steel is classified according to the following properties: Strength, denoting the value of tensile strength fp and the value of the 0,1% proof stress (f p0,1k). Ductility, denoting the value of the ratio of tensile strength to proof strength (f pk /f p0,1k), which should be at least 1.1, and elongation at maximum load ( uk). Although it's not indicated in EC2, in accordance with EN10138 uk should be at least 0,035. Class, indicating the relaxation behaviour. Three classes are defined in the Eurocode: Class 1: wire or strand ordinary relaxation Class 2: wire or strand low relaxation Class 3: hot rolled and processed bars The design calculations for the losses due to relaxation of the prestressing steel should be based on the value of 1000, the relaxation loss (in %) at 1000 hours after tensioning and at a mean temperature of 20 C. The value of 1000 is expressed as a percentage ratio of the initial stress and is obtained for an initial stress equal to 0,7f p, where f p is the actual tensile strength of the prestressing steel samples values indicated in EC2 for structural design are: 8% for Class 1, 2,5% for Class 2, 4% for Class 3. Clause [3.3.2(7)-EC2] gives the formulae for calculation of relaxation at different t times for the three above-mentioned classes. Annex [D-EC2] provides the elements needed for accurate calculations. Fatigue: prestressing tendons are liable to fatigue. Relevant criteria and methods for verification are Page 3-12

42 Guide to EC2 Section Fatigue Design assumptions given at clause [6.8-EC2]. On top of strength and ductility values, the Eurocode provides the following design assumptions: Modulus of elasticity recommended for strands: N/mm 2 ; for wires and bars: N/mm 2 Design stress-strain diagrams. As represented in Fig. 3.19, taken the safety factor S = 1,15, the design diagram is made of a rectilinear part up to ordinate f pd from which two ways start: a rectilinear inclined branch, with a strain limit ud = 0,9 uk, or 0,02; the other branch is a horizontal branch without strain limit. Figure Idealised and design stress-strain diagrams for prestressing steel [Fig EC2] Prestressing tendons in sheaths 3.4 Prestressing devices LITERATURE Aitcin, P., Demystifying Autogenous Shrinkage, Concrete International, 1999, pp CEB-Bulletin 228, High Performance Concrete: Recommended Extensions to Model Code 90, Report on the CEB-FIP Working Group on High Strength Concrete, July ENV Cement composition, specifications and conformity criteria Part 1 Common cements, 1992 fib, Structural Concrete: Text Book on Behaviour, Design and Performance, Upgraded Knowledge of the CEB/FIP Model Code Han, N., Time dependant behaviour of high strength concrete, PhD thesis, Delft University of Technology, The Netherlands, JCI Technical Committee Report on Autogenous Shrinkage Autogenous Shrinkage of Concrete: Proceedings of the International Workshop, ed. Tazawa, E&FN Spon, London, 1998, pp Koenders, E., van Breugel, K., Second Stichtse Bridge Concrete with high strength: experimental research into the creep and relaxation behaviour during the early stage of the hardening process, Report , Feb. 1996, TU Delft (in Dutch). Müller, H.S., Küttner, C.H., Creep of High Performance Concrete Characterisation and Code Type Prediction Model, 4th International Symposium on Utilisation of Highstrength/ High Performance Concrete, Paris, 1996, pp. 377/386 Müller, H.S., Küttner, C.H., Kvitsel, V., Creep and shrinkage models for normal and high performance concrete a unified code type approach, Revue Francaise du Genie Civil (1999) Neville, A.M., Properties of concrete, Pitman Publishing Limited, London 1995, Page 3-13

43 Guide to EC2 Section 3 In Table 3.4 the values for c2u follow from Eq. (6-9) The values for c2 and n are obtained by curve fitting to the relations shown in Fig An approximate expression for c2 is: c2( ) = 2.0 for f ck 50 Mpa (12a) c2 ( ) = (f ck 50) 0,53 for f ck > 50 Mpa (12b) and for n: n = 2.0 for f ck 50 Mpa (13a) n = [(90 f ck)/100] 4 for f ck > 50 MPa (13b) The resulting design curves are shown in Fig A second possibility is the use of a bilinear design stress-strain relation (Fig. 3.10). The values c3 and c3u are obtained by curve fitting to the relations shown in Fig. 3.7, and are given in Table 3.5. Table 3.5. Parameters for the bilinear design stress-strain relation in compression C20 C35 C50 C55 C60 C70 C80 C90 c3( ) 1,75 1,75 1,75 1,75 1,90 2,1 2,2 2,3 cu3( ) 3,5 3,5 3,5 3,1 2,9 2,7 2,6 2,6 The values for c3u are the same as for c2u and follow therefore from Eq. 9. An approximate expression for c3 is c3 ( ) = 1.75 for f ck < 55 MPa c3 ( ) = (f ck 55)0.42 for f ck 55 MPa (14a) (14b) The design stress-strain relations derived in this way are shown in Fig Figure Bilinear design stress-strain relation Fig Design stress-strain curves with bilinear formation Fig shows the comparison for the basic design stress strain relations (derived from the mean curve by taking the characteristic value and dividing it by c = 1.5) and the simplified design curves, Page 3-8

44 Guide to EC2 Section 3 Nilson, A., High Strength Concrete- An Overview of Concrete Research, Proceedings of the Conference Utilisation of High Strength Concrete, Stavanger Walraven, J.C., High Performance Concrete Bridges, a European Perspective, Conference on Developments in Short and Medium Span Bridge Engineering, Calgary, Canada, 98, Proceedings, Part I, pp Walraven, J.C., Size effects: their nature and their recognition in building codes, STUDI E RICERCHE Vol. 16, 1995, pp Page 3-14

45 Guide to EC2 Section 4 SECTION 4 DURABILITY AND COVER TO REINFORCEMENT SECTION 4. DURABILITY AND CONCRETE COVER C4 The rules on design for durability in EC2 are substantially different than in the past. Previously the concrete cover was prescribed in dependence of the environmental class, but independent of the concrete quality. In the actual version of EC2 (EN ) the cover required depends not only on the environmental class, but as well on the concrete strength class, the required design working life and the quality control applied. In the following, background information is given with regard to those choices. The values for the cover in EN are a result of increased understanding in the processes of deterioration, as revealed by the Duracrete studies [1], and practical experience. In the following theoretical considerations the most important deterioration processes are explained and parameter studies illustrate the mutual dependencies. Further background information is found in FIB Bulletin n. 34 Model code for service life design [2] Introduction In a European research project [1] a probabilistic based durability design procedure of concrete structures has been developed with the objective to set up a similar concept as in structural design, where the resistance of the structure is compared to the acting load. Related to corrosion protection of reinforcement the resistance of a concrete structure is mainly determined by the thickness and the quality of the concrete cover. In the European design code for concrete structures EN the designer has to determine the nominal concrete cover, which consists of the minimum concrete cover (dependent on the relevant environmental class) plus an allowance in design for tolerance. According to the first draft of pren the allowance in design for tolerance was also dependent on the environmental class 10 mm for XC0 and XC1 and 15 mm for all other classes. This rule was changed with respect to the general requirement that values or rules specified in other Eurocodes should not explicitly given again in EN but they should only be referred to. Thereafter in the December 99 draft of pren the allowance in design for tolerance was determined with respect to the execution standard prenv where the execution tolerance is uniformly defined to 10 mm. This means a reduction of the nominal cover if the values for the minimum cover are not increased accordingly. In order to find out which value for the nominal concrete cover is adequate a durability design was performed, based in the model in the European project. In particular, the reliability index was determined and evaluated for different concrete mixes and different nominal concrete covers. The concrete mixes have been chosen with respect to the environmental classes given in EN Description of Deterioration Models and Probabilistic Durability Design This chapter only gives a short overview on those models, since the deterioration models related to reinforcement corrosion and the safety concept of durability design have already been thoroughly described in the literature Deterioration Models The corrosion process can be divided into two time periods: the initiation period describes the time until the reinforcement is depassivated either by carbonation or by penetrating chlorides reaching a critical chloride content. After depassivation, corrosion will start if sufficient oxygen and moisture are available. As a result of corrosion a reduction of the steel cross section, cracking or spalling of the concrete cover will occur. This time period is described as the propagation period. In the literature deterioration models [2], by which the processes of the initiation period can be described, are well established. The process of the propagation period is much more complex and so far no unanimously accepted models exist. In the following the time-dependent description of the carbonation progress and the time dependent diffusion-controlled penetration of chlorides are briefly presented Carbonation-Induced Corrosion The CEB Task Group V model by which the carbonation process in the initiation period can be predicted is given in equation (4.1): 2ke kc DEff,0 C t0 xc t = t a t where: x c(t) D Eff,0 is the carbonation depth at time t w (4.1) effective diffusion coefficient of dry concrete for carbon dioxide in defined environment (20 C, 65% rel. humidity) Page 4-1

46 Guide to EC2 Section 4 a C k e k c w t 0 t the amount of CO 2 for complete carbonation [kgco 2/m³] the concentration difference of CO 2 at the carbonation front and in the air, which usually means the carbon dioxide content of the surrounding air c 0 parameter for micro climatic conditions, describing the mean moisture content of concrete parameter to describe the curing conditions parameter (exponent) for micro climatic conditions at the concrete surface, describing wetting and drying reference period, law valid (e.g. 1 year) t time Chloride-Induced Corrosion The model for predicting the initiation period in the case of chloride-induced reinforcement corrosion is defined by equation (4.2): t0 x t =2Ccrit kt DRCM,0 ke t t n k td RCM,0 = D 0 (4.3) C C crit =erf 1- C where: x(t) D 0 C crit n -1 crit SN depth with a corresponding chloride content (here C (crit)) at time (t) (4.2) (4.4) effective chloride diffusion coefficient under defined compaction, curing and environmental conditions, measured at time t 0 D RCM,0 chloride migration coefficient under defined compaction, curing and environmental conditions, measured at time t 0 chloride threshold level factor which takes the influence of age on material property into account k t constant which transforms the measured chloride migration coefficient D RCM,0 into a chloride diffusion coefficient D 0 k e constant which considers the influence of environment on D 0 erf -1 inverse of the error function C SN t t 0 surface chloride level time reference period (28 days) Probabilistic Durability Design Safety Concept The simplest design problems have only one resistance variable and one action variable. They are generally solved by facing the two variables R and S: Z = R S (4.5) where Z is the reliability of the structure, R the resistance and S the action: both variables R and S have their averages and standard deviations, and in this example they are normally distributed. Z is a variable itself (see Figure 4.1) and is also normally distributed with a mean z and a standard deviation z according to equations (4.6) and (4.7). Z R S (4.6) 2 2 z R S (4.7) In this simplest case with two variables, the reliability index is the difference between the mean values of R and S divided by the standard deviation of the variable Z or, alternatively the mean value of Z divided by the standard deviation of Z (see Equation 4.8, Figure 4.1): Page 4-2

47 Guide to EC2 Section 4 pf z z where (.) stands for a normal distribution and p f for the failure probability. Figure 4.1 resistance, action, failure probability and reliability index The numerical problems which are treated in the context of durability design are not as easy to calculate as this, because there are numerous variables which have to be statistically evaluated and they are often part of non-linear functions. Besides these aspects, variables are not always normally distributed. For this reason, computer programs are used to calculate these kinds of problems Definition of reliability levels As already mentioned, the corrosion process can be divided into two time periods. For both periods, limit state conditions can be defined. Depassivation of the reinforcement (= end of the initiation period) is defined as a serviceability limit state (SLS), because after the end of the initiation period the corrosion process starts [1]. As the corrosion process in the propagation period can lead to severe consequences (loss of safety of people and structure), this situation is defined as ultimate limit state (ULS). Since the calculations performed in this study only concern the initiation period, the durability design presented here durability design is a SLS assessment. Design limit states are often defined by means of the reliability index According to EN1990, the reliability index for SLS is determined to = 1,5; in other National Standards the reliability index is even higher. In the case of durability design a risk oriented grading of the reliability index is proposed. Because of the fact that only the initiation period is considered, the corrosion process itself is so far not included in durability design. A possible way of taking account of the different corrosion risks is to adjust the reliability index to the environmental classes. As a consequence, with respect to the corrosion process a moderate humid environment (e.g. XD1) or environments with cyclic wetting and drying (XC4, XD3, XS3) should fulfil higher safety requirements than totally dry or wet environments (e.g.xc1, XC2, XC3, XS2, XD2) and therefore a higher reliability index is proposed. For the same reason in chloride environments higher reliability indices should be applied due to the risk of higher corrosion rates compared to carbonation induced corrosion. A proposal is given in Table 4.1. Environmental class Reliability index SLS,50 XC4, XD1, XS1, XS3, XD3 2,0 XC2, XC3, XS2, XD2 1,5 XC1 0,5 Table 4.1: Required reliability index bsls,50 for a life time of 50 years 4.3 Parametric Study General The calculations are based on the models given in and All input values are given as stochastic variables (mean, standard deviation, type of distribution). The output of the program is the reliability indexas a function of the lifetime. In this study the reliability indexis considered for a lifetime of 50 years Carbonation The type of cement has a strong influence on the concrete resistance against carbonation. Concretes with Portland cement are exposed to carbonation they show a decreasing porosity in the carbonation zone resulting in higher resistance against ongoing carbonation. In concretes with blastfurnace cements or with cements with pozzolanic additions (e.g. fly ash), on contrary, the porosity of the concrete increases after carbonation and the carbonation of the concrete sometimes progresses faster (as the diffusion of CO 2 takes place through the carbonated zone). The influence Page 4-3

48 Guide to EC2 Section 4 of different types of cement is not considered. In the calculations two different concrete mixes (favourable and unfavourable) were studied. The w/c ratio of the concrete mixes were chosen according to the requirements in pren The cement content was kept constant (320 kg/m³) for all concrete mixes, because there is only a minor influence on the carbonation process. The material resistance was determined under laboratory conditions. The length of the curing period also has a strong influence on carbonation. In the calculations the curing time was assumed to be 2 days for CEM I and 3 days for CEM III/B. The climatic conditions were determined according to statistical data from local weather stations. All calculations were performed for European locations with moderate and hot climate to show the influence of temperature Environmental class XC2 In the following, durability design calculations for nominal covers of 30 and 35 mm, for different climates and for different cements (CEM I and for CEM III/B) are performed. In Figure 4.2 the results of the calculations are shown. Figure 4.2: Reliability index versus concrete cover for environmental class XC2 (w/c=0,6,service life 50 years) a) for CEM I 42,5 R (curing 2 days) b) for CEM III/B 42,5 NW HS NA (curing 3 days) It can be seen that the reliability index for the calculated values depends on the concrete cover, the location and the type of cement. Especially in the case of a CEM III/B, the reduction of the concrete cover by 5 mm results in a decrease of the reliability index of almost 50 %. This means a reduction of life time of more than 15 years. It is interesting to see that the choice of a different type of cement has a bigger influence than the reduction of the concrete cover. However it needs to be taken into account that part of the effect depending by the type of cement can be counteracted by prolonged curing Environmental class XC3 For environmental class XC3 the same concrete covers are required as for XC2, but the required w/c ratio for class XC2 is higher. It can be seen, that this improvement of the concrete quality (porosity) also has an important effect on the carbonation (compare Figures 4.2 and 4.3). Apart from this the same trends can be observed. The reduction of the nominal concrete cover from 35 to 30 mm has a big influence on the reliability index, even more pronounced than for concretes with a w/c ratio according to the requirements for XC2. Figure 4.3: Reliability index versus concrete cover for environmental class XC3 (w/c=0,55, service life 50 years) a) for CEM I 42,5 R (curing 2 days) b) for CEM III/B 42,5 NW HS NA (curing 3 days) Environmental class XC4 For environmental class XC4, the w/c-value is reduced to 0,5 and compared to the environmental classes XC2 and XC3 the concrete cover is increased by 5 mm. This has a considerable effect on the reliability index (compare Figures 4.1a, 4.2a and 4.3a). Although the required reliability index according to Table 4.1 is increased to 2,0 for XC4 all concrete covers are still above the value for Page 4-4

49 Guide to EC2 Section 4 CEM I. However when using a CEM III/B type of cement, (see Figure 4.3b), the reliability index is reduced by 50% and is far below the reliability index proposed for this environmental class. An additional reduction of the concrete cover means a further reduction of the reliability index. The considerable difference in reliability index as a consequence of using two types of cements shows that the currently existing requirements for the determination of the concrete cover do not include all important parameters and are therefore not very exact. For a nominal concrete cover of 40 mm, the model seems to put in evidence that the deviation of the proposed reliability index is still acceptable, whereas a nominal concrete cover of 35 mm leads to an unacceptable decrease of total life time. Figure Reliability index versus concrete cover for environmental class XC4(w/c=0,50) a) for CEM I 42,5 R b) for CEM III/B 42,5 NW HS NA Chloride penetration Chlorides are transported in the concrete by the pore water. Processes of diffusion and conveyance by water transport take place which lead to a certain chloride content in the concrete. The time before attainment of a critical chloride content depends mainly on the porosity of the concrete, which may be influenced for example by the w/c ratio and the type of cement. In general, the use of Portland cements leads to a higher permeability of the concrete for chlorides than the use of blastfurnace cements or cements with fly ash. In this study only environmental class XS3 with nominal concrete covers of 50 and 55 mm was studied. The w/c ratio of the corresponding concrete mix was determined according to EN (w/c = 0,45) and the cement content was 320 kg/m³. The climatic conditions (relative humidity and temperature) were determined according to statistical data of local weather stations and the calculations were performed for two European locations close to the sea in moderate and hot climate. The calculations were performed with two different types of cement [1]: the results for a CEM I with fly ash are shown in Figure 4.4. Alternatively the calculation was performed with CEM I without fly ash [1]. The reliability index for a lifetime of 50 years was below 0, that means that corrosion probability is higher than 50%. Examples have shown that the use of Portland cements in tidal environments (e.g. harbours) has already led to deterioration (cracking) as a result of chloride induced corrosion after 10 years. The calculation with Portland cement plus fly ash has shown similar trends as in the case of carbonation. Figure 4.5 shows that hot climates result in faster chloride ingress than moderate climates. It can also be seen, that the proposed reliability index is not reached for environmental class XS4. Figure 4.5: Reliability index versus concrete cover for environmental class XS3 (w/c=0,45) a) for CEM I with fly ash Page 4-5

50 Guide to EC2 Section 4 The results of chapters 3.2 and 3.3 have shown that lower values for the nominal concrete cover result in a significant reduction of the reliability index, leading to a decrease of the safety against reinforcement corrosion. It can be concluded that the nominal concrete cover should not be decreased as a consequence of the reduction of allowance in design for tolerance. 4.4 Conclusions The calculations have shown the dependence of the rate of deterioration on the service life, the thickness of the concrete cover and the environmental class. It is shown that the provisions as given in EC-2 recognize the most important influencing factors. Further influences, which have not yet been regarded in detail in EN are the type of cement and the temperature. The comparisons show that, theoretically, the prescribed reliability indexes are not always met. It should be realized, however, that there are many uncertainties in the input values of the calculations. Further to the influence of the type of cement and the temperature there is the variation in climatic conditions (wet - dry cycles, local differences due to different orientation with regard to solar radiation and wind). The recommendations in the code are the result of theoretical considerations and engineering experience. In some respects the deterioration models give valuable information. It is shown for instance that prolonging the service life of a structure from 50 to 100 years requires globally an increase of the concrete cover between 8 and 12 mm. The advised increase of 10mm is therefore a good average value, regarding the many unknown factors. Moreover, research is necessary to close the gap between scientific models and practical observations. See example n. 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4. Reference [1] DuraCrete Probabilistic Performance Based Durability Design of Concrete Structures: Statistical Quantification of the Variables in the Limit State Functions. Report No.: BE , pp , [2] FIB Bullettin n. 34 Model Code for Service Life Design, June 2006, ISBN Page 4-6

51 Guide to EC2 Section 5 SECTION 5 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS 5.1 General 5.2 Geometric imperfections SECTION 5. STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS C5.1 General Structural analysis is the process of determination of the effects of actions (forces, impressed strain) in terms of tensional states or strain on a geometrically and mechanically defined structure. The analysis implies a preliminary idealisation of the structure, based on more or less refined assumptions of behaviour. There are four types of idealisations: - linear elastic behaviour that assumes, for analysis, uncracked cross sections and perfect elasticity. The design procedures for linear analysis are given in [5.4-EC2]; - linear elastic behaviour with limited redistribution [5.5-EC2]. It is a design (not analysis) procedure based on mixed assumptions, derived from both the linear and non-linear analysis. - plastic behaviour. Its kinematic approach [5.6-EC2], assumes at ultimate limit state the transformation of the structure in a mechanism through the formation of plastic hinges; in its static approach, the structure is represented by compressed and tensioned elements (strut and tie model); - non linear behaviour, that takes into account, for increasing actions, cracking, plastification of reinforcement steel beyond yielding, and plasticization of compressed concrete. The design procedures for non-linear analysis are given in [5.7-EC2]; The rules in the EN are technically rather similar to those in the ENV. However, the discontinuities mentioned above have been removed, and the rules have been coordinated between EC2, EC3 and EC4, see The EN rules are not repeated here. C5.2. Geometric imperfection Symbols Imperfections and tolerances The minimum value of the basic inclination is now 1/300 instead of 1/200 and 1/400 (with and without 2 nd order effects respectively). A good reason for having one value, independent of the importance of 2 nd order effects, is to avoid the accumulation of discontinuities. The present value is also well correlated with the tolerances given for class 1 in EN 13670, see figure 1. An upper limit 1/200 for the basic value has also been added. Figure 5.1. Comparison between imperfection and tolerances. The thick lines represent imperfections, the black line represents basic imperfection0 according to expression 5.1 in EN , whereas the grey line represents the lower limit of the mean value l for a structure (m = ). The thin lines represent the tolerance according to EN13670; the solid line represents a member in one storey, the dashed line the total inclination of a structure. For the total inclination of a column or wall in a structure, the tolerance continues to decrease below the minimum value 1/300 when the number of storeys exceeds 8. The mean value of the imperfection will also decrease in a structure where a number of individual members contribute to the total effect; the lower limit of the mean value (for m = ) is shown in figure 5.1. The fact that the mean imperfection i is sometimes less than the structural tolerance does not Page 5-1

52 Guide to EC2 Section 5 mean that the imperfection is on the unsafe side. The tolerance has to be checked for individual columns and walls, whereas im represents the average inclination of all vertical members contributing to a certain effect Equivalent eccentricity or horizontal force For isolated members, like in the ENV, the inclination can be transformed to either an equivalent eccentricity (or initial deflection) e i or a horizontal force Hi. This is important for e.g. a pin-ended column, where an inclination has no effect on the column itself. The eccentricity can then represent either an uncertainty in the position of the axial load, or an initial deflection (out-ofstraightness). The equivalent eccentricity is linked to the effective length, and the horizontal force should give the same bending moment as the eccentricity (see figure 5.1 in EN chapter 5.2): Equivalent eccentricity: e i = i l 0/2 (l 0 is the effective length) Cantilever: e i = il M i = Ne i = Nil = H il H i = in Pin-ended: e i = il/2 M i = Ne i = N il/2 = H il/4 H i =2 in Dealing with first order effects Imperfections can be treated as first order effects, or be added as separate safety elements without any physical meaning, outside the second order analysis. With a method like the curvature method ( model column method in ENV), which gives a fixed second order moment independent of the first order moment, there is no difference between the two approaches. In other methods, however, the second order effects depend on the first order effects, and then it does make a difference whether imperfections are treated as first order effects, or added separately. In P(1) in the ENV, the imperfection is associated with uncertainties in the prediction of second order effects, which indicates that it is not regarded as a first order effect. The definition of the first order eccentricity in further underlines this. On the other hand, formulations in describe the imperfection rather as a first order effect. Thus, the ENV is ambiguous and unclear in this respect. In the EN it is stated once and for all that imperfections are to be treated as first order effects; see the definition in This corresponds to a physical interpretation of the imperfection as a deviation in the form of an inclination, an eccentricity or an initial deflection. This is logical, since there is a link between imperfections and tolerances. It is essential to have a clear definition in this respect for the overall analysis of structures, but also for isolated members, when other methods than the curvature method are used; see and Idealisation of the structure Structural models for overall analysis C5.3 Structural models C5.3.1 Classification of structural elements For buildings, as a convention, the following provisions apply: 5. a beam is a linear element, for which the span is not less than 3 times the overall section depth. Otherwise it should be considered as a deep beam. 6. a slab is a bidimensional member for which the minimum panel dimension is not less than 5 times the overall slab thickness. Moreover: a slab subjected to dominantly uniformly distributed loads may be considered to be one-way spanning if either (Fig. 4.2): - it possesses two free (unsupported) and sensibly parallel edges, or - it is the central part of a sensibly rectangular slab supported on four edges with a ratio of the longer to shorter span greater than ribbed or waffle slabs need not be treated as discrete elements for the purposes of analysis, provided that the flange or structural topping and transverse ribs have sufficient torsional stiffness. This may be assumed provided that (Fig. 4.2): - the rib spacing does not exceed 1500 mm - the depth of the rib below the flange does not exceed 4 times its width - the depth of the flange is at least 1/10 of the clear distance between ribs or 50 mm, whichever is the greater - transverse ribs are provided at a clear spacing not exceeding 10 times the overall depth of the slab. Page 5-2

53 Guide to EC2 Section 5 s h f h w 1500 mm s n/10 or 50 mm 4 b m s t 10 h 0 Figure. 5.2.Geometric parameters for slabs The minimum flange thickness of 50 mm may be reduced to 40 mm where permanent blocks are incorporated between the ribs. This exception applies for slabs with clay blocks only. It does not apply for expanded polystyrene blocks. An exception to this rule is given at [10.9.3(11)-EC2] in relation to prefabricated slabs without topping, which may be analysed as solid slabs provided that the in situ transverse ribs are provided with continuous reinforcement through the precast longitudinal ribs and at a spacing according to Table [10.1) - EC2]. A column is a member for which the section depth does not exceed 4 times its width and the height is at least 3 times the section depth. Otherwise it should be considered as a wall Geometric data Effective width of flanges (all limit states) C5.3.2 Geometric data C Effective width of flanges of T beams (valid for all limit states) If a T beam with a relatively wide flange is subjected to bending moment, the width of flange that effectively works with the rib in absorbing the compressive force (effective width) should be assessed. An exact calculation shows that the actual distribution of compressive stresses has a higher concentration in the part of flange which is close to the rib, and a progressive reduction in the further parts. This implies that the conservation of plane sections is not respected and that the neutral axis is not rectilinear, but is higher on both sides of the rib. In order to simplify calculations, the actual distribution of stresses is usually replaced by a conventional block, extended to the effective width. This allows the application of the usual design rules, and in particular the assumption that plane sections remain plane. Effective width is defined at [ EC2] as a function of the cross section geometry (b, distance between adjacent ribs; b w, width of ribs) and of the distance l o between points of zero moment. Note that the flange depth is not relevant, even if it is expressly cited in (1)P, and that the distance between points of zero moment depends, for continuous beams, on the type of loading Fig. 5.2-EC2 is an example of a continuous beam (subjected to a uniform load distribution) where the l o distance for spans and for parts on supports is identified. Hence different sections have different effective width. Point (4) makes clear that a constant width may be assumed over the whole span. The value applicable to the span section should be adopted. Figure 5.3. Definition of l o for calculation of the effective flange width [Fig. 5.2 EC2]. Figure 5.4. Parameters to determine effective flange width [fig. 5.3 EC2] Page 5-3

54 Guide to EC2 Section Effective span of beams and slabs in buildings C Effective span of beams and slabs in buildings This paragraph defines the effective span length mainly for member analysis, taking into account the different types of support. Two important points must be noted: Where a beam or slab is monolithic with its supports, the critical design moment at the support may be taken as that at the face of the support. That moment should not be less than 65% that of the full fixed end moment. The design moment and reaction transferred to the supporting element should be taken as the greater of the elastic or redistributed values. Regardless of the method of analysis used, where a beam or slab is continuous over a support which may be considered to provide no restraint to rotation, the design support moment, calculated on the basis of a span equal to the centre-to-centre distance between supports, may be reduced by: M Ed = F Ed,sup t / 8 where F Ed,sup is the design support reaction t is the breadth of the support. This formula derives by assuming an uniform distribution of the design support reaction F ed,sup over the breadth of the support FEd,sup t t FEd,sup t M Ed= = t Linear elastic analysis C5.4 Linear elastic analysis For the determination of load effects, linear analysis may be used assuming: uncracked cross sections, linear stress-strain relationships and mean value of the modulus of elasticity. With these assumptions, stresses are proportional to loads and therefore the superposition principle applies. For thermal deformation, settlement and shrinkage effects at the ultimate limit state (ULS), a reduced stiffness corresponding to the cracked sections, neglecting tension stiffening but including the effects of creep, may be assumed in accordance with [5.4(3)-EC2]. For the serviceability limit state (SLS) a gradual evolution of cracking should be considered. Comments. In the previous explanation the expression For the determination of load effects was used, whereas [5.4(3)-EC2] admits For the determination of action effects, therefore of all actions, including thermal deformation, settlement and shrinkage for which [5.4(3)-EC2] admits different assumptions, without which the effects of impressed deformations would be devastating and quantitatively incorrect. the fact that no limits were set to (x u/d) for the application of the linear analysis method at the ultimate limit states, does not mean that any value of (x u/d) may be used in design: it's opportune to observe a limit consistent with the method of linear elastic analysis with limited redistribution, for which x u/d 0,45. It must be remembered that increasing values of x u/d the model uncertainty also increases and higher safety factors should be assumed for precaution. 5.5 Linear analysis with limited redistribution C5.5 Linear elastic analysis with limited redistribution [5.5 - EC2] At ultimate limit state plastic rotations occur at the most stressed sections. These rotations transfer to other zones the effect of further load increase, thus allowing to take, for the design of reinforcement, a reduced bending moment M, smaller than the moment M resulting from elastic linear design, provided that in the other parts of the structure the corresponding variations of load effects (viz. shear), necessary to ensure equilibrium, are considered. Despite being named Linear analysis with limited redistribution, this is a design method. In clause [5.5(4)-EC2], in relation with continuous beams and slabs with ratio between adjacent spans in the range [0,5 2] expressions are given for the redistribution factor in function of the concrete class, the type of steel and the x u/d ratio after redistribution. For instance, for concrete up to C50 and reinforcing steel of type B and C, respectively of average and high ductility, the expression is: 0,44 + 1,25 (x u/d) ; 0,70 [5.10a EC2] (4.8) where: is the ratio of the redistributed moment to the elastic bending moment x u is the depth of the neutral axis at the ultimate limit state after redistribution d is the effective depth of the section Page 5-4

55 Guide to EC2 Section Plastic analysis 5.7 Non-linear analysis The limits of this formula are: = 0,70 per (x u/d) = 0,208 and = 1 per (x u/d) = 0,45 It must be considered that a redistribution carried out in observance of the ductility rules only ensures equilibrium at the ultimate limit state. Specific verifications are needed for the serviceability limit states. Very high redistributions, which may be of advantage at the ultimate limit states, very often must be lowered in order to meet the requirements of serviceability limit states. For the design of columns the elastic moments from frame action should be used without any redistribution. C5.6 Plastic analysis Plastic analysis should be based either on the lower bound (static) method or on the upper bound (kinematic) method for the check at ULS only Static method It is based on the static theorem of the theory of plasticity, which states: whichever load Q, to which a statically admissible tension field corresponds, is lower or equal to the ultimate load Q u". The expression statically admissible indicates a field that meets both the conditions of equilibrium and the boundary condition without exceeding the plastic resistance. An important application of this method is the strut-and-tie scheme [5.6.4 EC2]. Other applications are the management of shear by the method of varying and the analysis of slabs by the equivalent frame analysis method [Annex I EC2] Kinematic method In this method, the structure at ultimate limit states becomes a mechanism of rigid elements connected by yield hinges. The method is based on the kinematic theorem, which states: every load Q, to which corresponds a kinematically admissible mechanism of collapse, is higher or equal to the ultimate load Q u". The method is applied for continuous beams, frames and slabs (in this last case with the theory of yield lines. For beams, clause [5.6.2)-EC2] states that the formation of plastic hinges is guaranteed provided that the following are fulfilled: i) the area of tensile reinforcement is limited such that, at any section (x u /d) 0,25 for concrete strength classes C50/60 (x u /d) 0,15 for concrete strength classes C55/67 ii) reinforcing steel is either Class B or C iii) the ratio of the moments at intermediate supports to the moments in the span shall be between 0,5 and 2. If not all the conditions above are fulfilled, the rotation capacity must be verified, by checking the required rotations against those allowed in accordance with [Fig. 5.6N-EC2]. It should be remembered that the plastic analysis methods shall only be used for checking ultimate limit states. Serviceability limit states requirements should be checked by specific verifications. C5.7 Non-linear analysis Non-linear analysis is a procedure for calculation of action effects, based on idealisations of the non-linear behaviour of materials [non-linear constitutive laws: for concrete cf. Eurocode 2, 3.1.5(1) expression (3.14) and Fig. 3.2; for steel 3.2.7(1) Fig. 3.8], of the elements and of the structure (cracking, second order effects), suitable for the nature of the structure and for the ultimate limit state under consideration. It requires that the section geometry and reinforcement are defined, because it is a process of analysis. Resulting stresses are not proportional to the applied actions. The process is developed by computer-aided calculations, by verifying equilibrium and compatibility at every load increase. Compatibility conditions are normally expressed by assigning to each section its moment curvature law, and integrating the curvatures along the axis of the elements. Inelastic rotations are generally concentrated in the critical sections. Deformations due to shear are generally neglected, those in relation with axial load are taken into account only in case have significant influence on the solution. As the superposition principle does not apply because of the non-linearity, the calculations must be developed for each load condition: for each one it is conventionally assumed that the ultimate limit state is reached through a single proportional increase of the applied load. In the case of elements mainly subjected to bending, trilinear idealizations of the moment / rotations Page 5-5

56 Guide to EC2 Section 5 law of each critical section can be adopted as in Fig. 4.6, representing the three following states: first state (elastic and linear): characterized by EI rigidity of the entirely reacting sections; it ends when the tensional strength of concrete is reached (cracking moment) second state (cracked): from the cracking moment to the moment corresponding to steel yielding, moment increases are related to the curvature increases on the basis of rigidity E s A s z(d-x), where A s is the cross section of the tensioned reinforcement, z the lever arm, x the depth of the neutral axis. The rigidity can be increased by taking into account the contribution of concrete in tension between cracks ( tension stiffening ), but with caution in case of load cycles. third state (plastic): a third linear line can be idealized from the steel yielding clause to the point of failure moment. The line corresponds to a pl plastic rotation at the critical section, with a value that can be deducted from the diagram in Fig 5.6N of Eurocode 2 in function of the relative depth of the neutral axis. Following the evolution of response to actions, it is possible to verify the conditions for the serviceability limit states and for the ultimate limit state. Figure 5.5. Trilinear Moment Rotation relation for element mainly subjected to bending 5.8 Analysis of second order effects with axial load Definitions Page 5-6 C5.8 Second order effects with axial load C Definitions Definitions specific to chapter 5.8 are listed in Some comments are given below. Braced bracing The distinction braced bracing is simple: units or systems that are assumed to contribute to the stabilization of the structure are bracing elements, the others are braced. Bracing units/systems should be designed so that they, all together, have the necessary stiffness and resistance to develop stabilization forces. The braced ones, by definition, do not need to resist such forces. Buckling The word buckling has been reserved for the pure, hypothetical buckling of an initially straight member or structure, without load eccentricities or transverse loading. It is pointed out in a note that pure buckling is not a relevant limit state in real structures, due to the presence of imperfections, eccentricities and/or transverse loads. This is also a reason why the word buckling is avoided in the title of 5.8. In the text, buckling is mentioned only when a nominal buckling load is used as a parameter in certain calculation methods. First order effects First order effects are defined to include the effect of imperfections, interpreted as physical deviations in the form of inclinations or eccentricities. The ENV is ambiguous in this respect; see also clause C5.2. Nominal second order moment The nominal second order moment is used in certain simplified methods, to obtain a total moment used for design of cross sections to their ultimate moment resistance. It can be defined as the difference between the ultimate moment resistance and the first order moment, see 6.3. If the ultimate load is governed by instability before reaching the cross section resistance, then the nominal second order moment is greater than the true one; this is the reason for using the word nominal. Sway non-sway and global second order effects The terms sway non-sway have been omitted in the final draft, after many comments for or against. The words in themselves are misleading, since all structures are more or less sway ; a

57 Guide to EC2 Section 5 structure that would be classified as sway could be just as stiff as one classified as non-sway. These terms are now replaced by unbraced braced. In the ENV the concept of sway non-sway was linked to the criterion for neglecting global second order effects in structures. The classification of structures from this point of view remains in the EN, but without using the sway - non-sway terminology. A stiffness criterion like the one in ENV-A.3.2 was avoided in earlier drafts of the EN, since it was considered as too crude, and in some cases misleading. However, during the conversion process there were many requests to include some simple criterion for evaluating the significance of global second order effects, without the need for calculating them. This led to the present rules in and Informative Annex H, which are more general than those in ENV-A.3.2. The details are given in clause General C Basic criteria for neglecting second order effects Two basic criteria for ignoring second order effects have been discussed during the conversion process, namely: 1) 10 % increase of the corresponding first order effect, 2) 10 % reduction of the load capacity, assuming a constant eccentricity of the axial force. The first criterion is the one stated in (6), and in the ENV, (5). The second one has been claimed by some to be the true, hidden criterion behind the ENV-rules. Figure 5.6 illustrates the consequences of these two criteria in an interaction diagram for axial force and bending moment. Their effects on the slenderness limit are discussed in chapter 3. In a column or a structure it is the bending moment that is influenced by second order effects. The axial force is governed by vertical loads, and is not significantly affected by second order effects. Most design methods are based on calculating a bending moment, including a second order moment if it is significant. From this point of view, criterion 1 is the most logical and natural one. The basic criterion is further discussed in chapter 3 in connection with slenderness limits. Figure 5.6. Two different ways of defining the basic 10%-criterion for ignoring second order effects, see text above. (The interaction diagram was calculated for rectangular cross section 400 x 600 mm, concrete C35, = 0,1 (total mechanical reinforcement ratio), edge distance of reinforcement 60 mm.) Simplified criteria for second order effects Slenderness criterion for isolated members C Simplified criteria for ignoring 2nd order effects C Slenderness limit for isolated members General The load bearing capacity of a member in compression for low slenderness ratios is illustrated in figure 3-1 by means of interaction curves, calculated according to the general method in (See chapter 6 in this report for more details about interaction curves and the general method.) Page 5-7

58 Guide to EC2 Section 5 Figure 5.7. Interaction curves for low slenderness ratios, calculated for a pin-ended column with cross section as for figure 2-1 and subjected to a constant first order moment. Effective creep ratio ef = 0. Equal first order end moments M01 = M02 = M0. By combining figures 5.7 and 5.6, one can find the slenderness ratios for which the basic 10%- criterion is fulfilled; see figure 5.8. Figure 5.8 Effect of normal force (here n = N/fcdAc) on slenderness limit, depending on the interpretation of the 10 % criterion: % increase of bending moments for a given normal force % reduction of load capacity for a constant eccentricity ( = 0,3, ef = 0, M01/M02 = 1) Depending on which of the two basic criteria is chosen, see chapter 2, increasing the axial force will either decrease (1) or increase (2) the slenderness limit as shown in figure 3-2. Criterion 1 will be more severe for high axial loads, when there is little room for bending moments. Criterion 2, on the other hand, will allow very high slenderness ratios for high axial loads. In earlier drafts, including the October 2001 final draft, a slenderness limit independent of the axial force was chosen as a compromise between the two basic criteria; for = 0,1 the criterion was then identical to expression (4.62) in the ENV. In a comment to the final draft it was pointed out that a limit independent of the axial force could be much on the unsafe side in certain cases (see next chapter). Therefore, a new model was developed. The following is quoted from : (1) As an alternative to (6), second order effects may be ignored if the slenderness is below a certain value lim. The following may be used: lim = 20 A B C (5.13) where: slenderness ratio as defined in A = 1 / (1+0,2 ef) B = (1+ 2) / n Page 5-8

59 Guide to EC2 Section 5 C = 1,7 - r m ef effective creep ratio; see 5.8.4; if ef is not known, A = 0,7 may be used = A sf yd / (A cf cd); mechanical reinforcement ratio; if is not known, B = 1,2 / n may be used A s total area of longitudinal reinforcement n = N Ed / (A cf cd); relative normal force r m = M 01/M 02; moment ratio M 01, M 02 first order end moments, M02 M01 (2) If the end moments M 01 and M 02 give tension on the same side, r m should be taken positive (i.e. C < 1,7), otherwise negative (i.e. C > 1,7). In the following cases, r m should be taken as 1,0 (i.e. C = 0,7): - for braced members with first order moments only or predominantly due to imperfections or transverse loading - for unbraced members in general The background to the new criteria is presented in the following History of the slenderness limit in pren 1992 At an early stage of the conversion process (spring 1999), a slenderness limit was proposed in which the effective creep ratio ef and the relative normal force n were included as parameters. The reinforcement ratio was not included then, since it was considered impractical. Most people also considered it impractical and unnecessary to include creep; there was a widespread opinion that creep would have little effect at these low slenderness ratios. There was also a lot of discussion about the interpretation of the basic 10% criterion for ignoring second order effects, with the two main alternatives (see chapter 2): % increase of bending moments due to second order effects % reduction of the load capacity for a given eccentricity It was then demonstrated that the effect of the normal force on the slenderness limit was different depending on which alternative was used, see figure 5.8. However, there was no agreement as to which alternative to base the slenderness limit on, and therefore the ENV criterion (4.62), independent of the normal force, was used in draft 1. An addition was made in draft 2, allowing the constant 25 to be increased to 35 if the reinforcement ratio is at least 0,5. In the final draft October 2001 an interpolation was introduced to avoid discontinuity (expression (5.13)). In November 2001, shortly after the draft had been distributed, comments and examples were presented by Prof. J. Hellesland, showing that (5.13) might be extremely unsafe in some cases, e.g. a column bent in double curvature (end moments of different directions, figure 5.9), combined with a high effect of creep and a moderate or high normal force. Comments on earlier versions of pren , together with a general treatment of the slenderness limit, are given in [8]. Figure 5.9. Column bent in double curvature Background to the new proposal After receiving the above-mentioned comments and examples from Prof Hellesland, a systematic investigation of the slenderness limit was made, with focus on the effects of reinforcement, normal force, creep and moment ratio (different end moments). Figure 5.10 shows examples of the effect of a rather moderate effective creep ratio, ef =1. Page 5-9

60 Guide to EC2 Section 5 Curves according to both basic 10% criteria are shown. Table 5.1 shows some values taken from the figures. Figure Slenderness limit as a function of the relative normal force and the moment distribution. Concrete C40, = 0,3. (Solid lines = 10%-criterion alt. 1, dashed = alt. 2.) Table 5.1. Values of slenderness limit taken from figure 5.10, alternative 1 ( = 0,3. n M01/M02 lim Average reduction ef = 0 ef = 1 due to creep, % 1, , , , , , For n = 1,0, the average reduction due to creep is considerable, having in mind that ef = 1 represents a rather moderate effect of creep. With a higher value of ef the reduction is more severe (most of the comparisons were made with ef = 0 and 2 respectively, see Appendix 1). The effect of is considerable, as can be seen from both figure 5.11 and table 5.2. Without as a parameter, the slenderness limit would have to be either very conservative for high to moderate values of, or on the unsafe side for low values. However, since the reinforcement is normally not known when the slenderness criterion is checked, a default value based on a low value of has also been given. This can be used for a conservative estimation, or as a starting value in an iterative process. Figure Effect of reinforcement ratio on slenderness limit (only criterion 1 is shown here). n 0,4 0,8 Table 5.2. Values of slenderness limit taken from figure ( ef = 2) M01/M02 lim Average increase from = 0,1 = 0,5 = 0,1 to = 0,5 % 1, , , , There have been national comments proposing to include the effect of n in the slenderness limit. These proposals were rejected until and including the October 2001 draft, referring to figure 5.8 and the disagreement concerning the 10%-criterion. However, as can be seen from figures 5.10 and 5.11, with different end moments there is a strong reduction of the slenderness limit with increasing normal force, and that is true for both 10%-criteria. The only exception is when criterion 2 is applied to columns with equal end moments, see figure Page 5-10

61 Guide to EC2 Section Comparisons with previous model for slenderness limit In tables 5.3 and 5.4, values from tables 5.1 and 5.2 are compared with values according to the slenderness criterion in the October 2001 draft (expression 5.13): lim = 25( + 0,9) (2 - M 01/M 02) In both cases the 10 % criterion is according to alternative 1. Table 5.3. Slenderness limit in draft Oct compared to values from table 5.1 ( = 0,3) n 0,4 0,8 10% criterion (alt.1) ef = 0 ef = 1 Draft Oct , , , , M01/M02 For n = 0,5 and ef = 0 the values according to draft October 2001 are reasonable (table 5.3). For n = 1,0, however, they overestimate the slenderness limit, particularly for ef = 1 and most particularly for M 01/M 02 = 1, where it gives a 3 times too high value. Table 5.4. Slenderness limit in draft Oct compared to values from table 5.2 ( ef = 2). n M01/M02 lim Average increase from = 0,1 = 0,5 = 0,1 to = 0,5 % 1, , , , , , Draft October 2001 gives a fairly correct influence for, but it severely overestimates the slenderness limit for a high normal force combined with a high creep effect, see table 5.4 (here the values are based on ef = 2). The omission of the effects of both normal force and creep are the main disadvantages of this model. lim Comparisons with new model In tables 5.5 and 5.6 the new model (see p. 4) is compared to the same data as in tables 5.1and 5.2 respectively. Table 5.5. Slenderness limit according to new model compared with table 3-1 ( = 0,3). Table 5.6. Slenderness limit according to new model compared with table 5.2 ( ef = 2) Page 5-11

62 Guide to EC2 Section Discussion On the whole, the new model gives good agreement with the 10%-criterion (alt. 1), and the main parameters are taken well into account. There is a slight overestimation of the slenderness limit for n = 1,0 and ef = 1, table 5.5, also for = 0,1 and n = 0,8, table 5.6. However, the overestimations are small compared to the old model (see 3.1.4) and in both cases the values are conservative compared to 10%-criterion alt. 2. A complete verification of the new model is given in Appendix 1. A more sophisticated model could of course give even better agreement, e.g. by also including the concrete grade, but the present model is considered to be good enough. Concrete grade is indirectly taken into account in the n value. The importance of considering creep in the slenderness limit is further substantiated in Slenderness and effective length of isolated members C Effective length New expressions (5.15) and (5.16) for the effective length of isolated members in frames, were introduced in the second draft. Derived to give accurate estimation, based on the definition of effective length in 5.8.1, they replace figure 4.27 in the ENV as well as expressions (5.22) and (5.23) in draft 1 of the pren, December The expressions in draft 1 were taken from UK proposals, included in comments on the ENV and on earlier EN drafts. It was found that they are very conservative in some cases, giving up to 40 % overestimation of the effective length for braced members and on the unsafe side in other cases, giving up to 20 % underestimation of the effective length for unbraced members. It has been claimed that the conservativeness was deliberate, in order to cover certain unfavourable non-linear effects. However, the effective length is by definition based on linear behaviour, and the present models are aimed at giving an accurate estimation according to this, without including some hidden allowance for possible unfavourable effects. Such effects are instead explicitly addressed in (5) and in (4). The new expressions also avoid unsafe estimations, as in the case of unbraced members with the previous expressions. Figure 5.12a and b show comparison between an accurate numerical calculation of the effective length and estimations according to draft 1 (a) and final draft (b) respectively. Figure 5.12a. Effective length according to accurate and simplified calculations, draft 1 Figure 5.12b. Effective length according to accurate and simplified calculations, final version The present k-factors are defined differently compared to the corresponding factors in draft 1 and ENV, and are called k 1 and k 2 to avoid confusion with the previous factors k a and k b. The present k- factors express the relative flexibility of the restraint according to the definitions in figures 5.13 and They are applicable to different types of flexible moment restraint, such as beams with different boundary conditions, flexible foundations etc. Page 5-12

63 Guide to EC2 Section 5 Figure Flexibility of restraint, example of definition. Figure Comparison between different definitions of k-factors; examples (4) addresses the question whether an adjacent column (in a storey above or below) in a node should be considered as using the same restraint as the column considered, or as contributing to the restraint. This will depend on the magnitude of the axial force in the adjacent column. If both columns connected to the node reach their respective buckling load at the same time (under proportional increase of loads), they will both have to share the restraint provided by other connected members (beams), and k should then be defined as EIa EI c k= + (3-1) M la lc Here subscripts a and c refer respectively to the adjacent column and to the one considered see Figure In the opposite case, when the adjacent column has a relatively low axial load, it can be included among the members which resist the moment M, i.e. it will contribute to the restraint. A reasonable model for the transition between the two limiting cases gives by the following: EIa EI c k= + (3-2) M 1+ M Ma la lc where M 1, M 2 restraining moments in members 1, 2, see Figure 5.15 M a restraining moment in the adjacent column, see Figure 5.15, calculated without taking into account the axial force N a = N a/n Ba N a axial force on the adjacent column N Ba buckling load of the adjacent column (can be estimated approximately, e.g. taking into account only the horizontal members adjacent to its nodes) Page 5-13

64 Guide to EC2 Section 5 Figure Illustration of node with adjacent members Global second order effects in buildings C Global second order effects in structures Background a) Model in ENV, A.3.2 According to the ENV, global second order effects may be ignored, and the structure may be considered as non-sway, if L= FV EcmIc (3-3) Where L total height of building (h tot in the ENV) F V total vertical load (F V in the ENV) E cmi c sum of bending stiffnesses of bracing members 0,2 + 0,1n s 0,6 (in the ENV, no particular symbol is used for this parameter) number of storeys (n in the ENV) n s This criterion is valid only on certain conditions (not stated in the ENV): 1. No significant rotation at the base (rigid restraint / stiff foundation) 2. No significant global shear deformations (e.g. no significant openings in shear walls) These conditions are not fulfilled for e.g. a bracing system including frames, shear walls with large openings and/or flexible foundations. The criterion also explicitly requires that bracing members are uncracked. In practice, bracing members are often more or less cracked in ULS, due to high lateral and low vertical loadings (most of the vertical load is often carried by the braced members). For the above reasons, ENV A.3.2 has a very limited field of application. Since the limitations of the applicability are not stated, and no information is given for the cracked stage, there is a also risk that it is used outside the scope, giving unsafe results. b) New proposals Due to the above shortcomings, the ENV criterion was not included in earlier drafts of the EN. After many requests to include something similar, two alternative proposals were presented to CEN TC250/SC2 (Berlin, May 2000), a mini-version and a full version : Mini-version : same scope as in ENV-A.3.2, and a criterion given in a similar closed form. However, the conditions and restrictions are clearly stated, and the criterion is improved to be less conservative and to take into account cracking in a simple way. Full version : formulated in a more general and transparent way. Detailed information is given only for regular cases, but the formulation opens for general cases. A simple extension is given to cover the effect of global shear deformations. In the final draft a somewhat extended mini-version is given in the main text, and further extension to the full version are given in Annex H No significant shear deformations, rigid moment restraint The basic criterion second order effects 10% of first order effects gives, together with the simplified magnification factor for bending moment in (3): M M 0Ed Ed 1,1 M0Ed (3-4) 1-FV,Ed FV,BB This gives the following criterion for the vertical load, cf. expression (H.1): Here F V,Ed total vertical load F V,Ed F V,BB 0,1 / 1,1 0,1 F V,BB (3-5) Page 5-14

65 Guide to EC2 Section 5 F V,BB nominal buckling load for global bending (no shear deformations) M 0Ed first order moment M Ed design moment The global buckling load for bending can be written EI F V,BB = 0 2 L (3-6) where coefficient depending on number of storeys, distribution of vertical load etc. EI total bending stiffness of bracing members; to account for cracking in a simplified way EI is based on 0,4E cdi c; and for uncracked section 0,8 may be used instead of 0,4 L total height Note FV,BB is a nominal buckling load, calculated for a secant stiffness representing the relevant ULS conditions (including lateral loading). It is not a load for which pure buckling (without eccentricities or lateral loading) would occur. The coefficient 0,4 (or 0,8) for estimating the stiffness (see H.1.2 (3)) can be compared to 0,3/(1+ ef) in expression (5.26). Expression (5.26) is valid for isolated members, where all the vertical load considered acts on the member itself. Then there effects not only of cracking, but also of non-linearity in compression are considered. The last effect can be strong, particularly in cases where the section is uncracked, usually associated with high vertical load. For the same reason, a higher stiffness value for uncracked section is not given in In a structure, on the other hand, most of the vertical load is normally on the braced units, which means that there is less effect of compression non-linearity on the bracing units, in which case a particular value for uncracked section (0,8) is justified 1. A further difference is that the bending moment normally has a more favourable distribution in a bracing unit than in isolated members, which gives less overall effect of cracking. These circumstances together justify the use of 0,4/0,8 instead of 0,3/(1+ef). Creep is not included in the criterion for neglecting second order effects in structures (as it is for isolated members). The reason is that for global second order effects in structures, the dominating first order effect is wind. In this circumstance, there is little effect of creep, and consequently, the effective creep ratio according to will be low. The coefficient 0 in expression (3-6) depends on various parameters. For constant stiffness, equal load increment per storey and rigid moment restraint at the base, 0 will depend on the number of storeys and (to some extent) on the distribution of vertical load between braced and bracing members according to Figure 5.16 (the buckling load has been calculated numerically by Vianello s method, and 0 has then been evaluated according to expression (3-6)). Figure Global buckling due to bending and coefficient for buckling load. Constant stiffness and equal increment of vertical load per storey. The coefficient 0 according to the upper curve in Figure 5.16 can be approximated by where n s = number of storeys Combining expressions (3-4) to (3-6) gives 0 n s 7,8 n s +1,6 0,4E I n E I E I F 0,1 =0,312 = (3-8) cd c s cd c cd c V L n s +1,6 L L where 0,312 = 7,8 0,1 0,4 and = 0,312 n s /(n s + 1,6) 1 The ratio 0,5 between the stiffnesses for cracked and uncracked sections is of course a rough simplification. The ratio should depend on the reinforcement and the normal force, and with a normal force there is a more or less smooth transition between the two stages. However, since this is about cases where second order effects are more or less negligible, a simple rule is acceptable. Page 5-15

66 Guide to EC2 Section 5 This is the background to expression (5.18). Compare the ENV formulation (see above): L= F E I (3-10) V cm c Expression (5.18) can be formulated in the same way (substituting E cd with E cm and explicitly including partial factor ce = 1,2 on the right hand side): L= F E I 1,2 (3-11) V cm c In Figure 5.17 the two corresponding parameters /1,2 (EN) and 2 (ENV) are compared. For the EN, curves for both cracked and uncracked sections are shown. The ENV gives no values for cracked section, therefore there is no comparison for this case. The comparison shows that for uncracked section, the two models give rather similar results, although the ENV is often much more conservative. Figure Comparison between EN and ENV criteria Effect of flexible moment restraint Flexible moment restraint at the base will reduce the buckling load. This effect can be directly included in the factor for the buckling load. (For isolated members this effect is normally taken into account by increasing the effective length. In the global analysis of structures, however, a direct reduction of the buckling load is more convenient, since the effective length is not a practical parameter for bracing members and systems having varying axial load). For bracing units with two or more storeys, reasonably equal increment of the vertical load per storey and constant cross section, the isolated effect of flexible end restraint can be accurately modelled by the factor 1 1 (3-12) 1 0,7k M where k= (same definition as for isolated members, see 3.2) LEI = rotation for bending moment M (compare figure 5.13) The factor 1 is an approximation, which has been derived by calibration against accurate numerical calculation for different numbers of storeys, see figure The product 0 1 corresponds to in expression (H.2) in EN annex H. Figure Effect of flexibility of end restraint for bracing units. Solid curves represent the exact solution, dashed curve the approximation according to expression (3-12) The effect of flexible moment restraint is not covered in the ENV, therefore no comparison can be made. Effect of global shear deformations a) Shear deformations only (see Figure 5.19): The (hypothetical) buckling load for shear deformations only is: F V,BS = S (or S for more than one bracing unit) (3-13) Here S is the shear stiffness (= shear force giving a shear angle = 1; see figure H-1 in the EN). Page 5-16

67 Guide to EC2 Section 5 Figure Hypothetical buckling due to global shear deformations only Creep b) Combined bending and shear: The combined buckling load, taking into account bending and shear deformations, can be expressed as 1 FV,BB FV,BB F VB = = 1F +1F 1+F F 1+F S V,BB V,BS V,BB V, BS V,BB (3-14) Expression (3-14) can be derived analytically for simple cases like isolated members with constant normal force. By numerical calculations, it can be verified also for bracing units with vertically increasing axial load and significant global shear deformations (e.g. shear walls with large openings). The basic criterion for neglecting second order effects is the same as before: F V 0,1 F V,B (3-15) which leads to expression (H.6) in Annex H. This case is not covered in the ENV, therefore no comparison can be made. C Effective creep ratio General The ENV stated that creep should be considered in connection with second order effects, but gave no information on how. In the EN, on the other hand, practical models for taking into account creep are given, based on the so called effective creep ratio. A general approach would be to first calculate creep deformations under long-term load, then to analyse the structure for the additional load up to design load. With the effective creep ratio, the analysis can instead be made directly for the design load in one step. Figure 5.20 illustrates a hypothetical load history and the corresponding deformations. The total load is assumed to consist of one Long-term part Q L (corresponding to the quasi-permanent combination) and one additional short-term part up to the Design load Q D, applied after a long time. 2 The total load history can then be divided into three parts: 1. AB - long-term load Q L giving an elastic deformation 2. BC - constant load Q L giving a creep deformation based on full creep coefficient 3. CD - additional load (Q D - Q L) giving an additional elastic deformation Figure Illustration of load history and deformations The total deformation under long-term load can also be calculated directly using an equivalent E- modulus 3 for the concrete, E e = E c/(1+). This corresponds to line AC in figure The total deformation under design load can be calculated in a similar way if an effective creep ratio ef is used, line AD in figure The effective equivalent concrete modulus would then be E ef = E c/(1+ ef) where ef is the effective creep ratio Effect of creep in cross sections In the following, three examples are used to derive and illustrate the effective creep ratio ef. The examples deal with bending moment and curvature in the following cases, assuming linear elastic material behaviour: a) uncracked unreinforced cross section ( ) b) uncracked reinforced section ( ) c) cracked reinforced section ( ) Page 5-17

68 Guide to EC2 Section Uncracked unreinforced cross section This is the simplest case for demonstrating the idea behind the effective creep ratio. The total curvature under a long-term bending moment M L is (cf. line AC in figure 5.20): 1 ML = 1+ (4-1) r L EcIc The part caused by creep can be separated: 1 ML = (4-2) r C EcIc Under design load with total bending moment MD, part of which is a long-term moment ML with a load history according to figure 5.20, the total curvature will be 1 MD 1 MD ML M D M L MD = = = 1 = 1 ef r D EI c c r (4-3) C EI c c EI c c EI c c MD EI c c Thus, the effective creep ratio is (cf. expression (5.19), with different notation): ML ef = (4-4) M Uncracked reinforced cross section The total curvature under long-term bending moment M L can be expressed in the following simplified way, using an equivalent E-modulus for concrete (see second footnote in 5.20): 1 ML ML r E L EI c Ic EsIs 1 The part of this curvature caused by creep can be separated: 1 ML ML ML r E C EI c E cic EsI I s c EsIs 1 Introducing the following parameters: = (i s/i c) 2 = (E s/e c)(a s/a c) i c = radius of gyration of concrete area i s = radius of gyration of reinforcement area curvatures can be expressed in the following way: 1 ML 1+ = r E I L c c 1 M 1+ 1 = - L r C EcI c D Under design load and total bending moment M D the total curvature will be, including creep due to a long-term bending moment M L: 1 M 1 1 M 1 M 1+ 1 = + = + - D D L r D EcIc 1+ r C EcIc 1+ EcI c The same curvature expressed with the effective creep ratio would be, see expression (4-7): 1 MD 1+ ef = r D EcIc ef Combining expressions (4-9) and (4-10), after simplification: 1+ ef 1 M L 1+ 1 = ef 1+ M D From this the effective creep ratio can be solved: ef A = 1-A 2 Subscripts L and D are used in this chapter for simplicity; they correspond to Eqp and Ed in Non-linear effect will be dealt with later, see clause Theoretically this is not fully correct, since concrete stresses will decrease and reinforcement stresses increase with time. However, it is a reasonable approximation in most cases. (4-5) (4-6) (4-7) (4-8) (4-9) (4-10) (4-11) (4-12) Page 5-18

69 Guide to EC2 Section 5 where 1 M L 1+ 1 A= M D Figure 5.21 shows the relationship between ef and M L/M D for = 3 and different values of for the uncracked reinforced cross section. Figure Effective creep ratio as a function of the ratio ML/MD for = 3, uncracked rectangular cross section with symmetric reinforcement, edge distance t = 0,1h and =Es/Ec = 6 The straight line for = 0 is identical with expressions (4-4) and (5.19). With reinforcement, i.e. > 0, expression (5.19) becomes more or less conservative Cracked reinforced cross section The cracked cross section can be treated analogously, although it is a little more complicated. As the simplest case, consider a rectangular cross section with bending moment only and tensile reinforcement only. The flexural stiffness in the cracked stage (ignoring any contributions from concrete in tension) can then be expressed as EI E 2 sasd 11 3 (4-13) where As = area of reinforcement d = effective depth = x/d x = depth of compression zone The relative depth of compression zone for a certain creep coefficient can be obtained from 2 = (4-14) 1+ where = (E s/e c)(a s/a c) To simplify expressions, introduce the symbol 1 B = (4-15) The total curvature under design load can then be written: 1 MD ML MD = B B -B 0= B 2 ef (4-16) r EAd EAd EAd D s s s s s s where B 0 is parameter according to expression (4-15) for = 0 and Bef is the same for = ef. Values of ef for which expression (4-16) is satisfied can be found by iteration (direct solution is not possible in this case). Figure 5.22 shows the result for = 3. Page 5-19

70 Guide to EC2 Section 5 Figure Effective creep ratio as a function of ratio ML/MD for a cracked rectangular cross section with tensile reinforcement only, based on d = 0,9h and = 6. Basic creep coefficient = 3 In this case the curves will approach the straight line according to expression (5.19) the higher the reinforcement ratio is. However, curves for low and moderate ratios are also quite close Conclusions concerning cross sections The idea behind the effective creep ratio in is illustrated in figure 5.20 and demonstrated in three examples. The simple linear relationship according to expression (5.19) is always more or less conservative, but deviations are generally small. Furthermore, in a reinforced section the overall effect of creep on stiffness is reduced with increasing reinforcement, since creep only affects the concrete contribution to the stiffness. Therefore, the effect of deviations on the stiffness will not be as high as it may appear from the above figures Effect of creep in slender columns General The above conclusion concern only cross sections and are based on linear material behaviour. In this point the relevance of the effective creep ratio for slender columns are examined. A slender column behaves in a non-linear way, due to both material and geometrical non-linearity. A non-linear behaviour similar to the linear one in figure 5.20 is outlined in figure Figure Illustration of load history and deformations with nonlinear behaviour The load history can be divided into three steps: 1. Application of long-term load Q L, immediate deformation y 1, calculated for ef = 0 2. Long-term load Q L during time t-t 0, total deformation y 2, calculated for ef = 3. Load increase up to design load Q D, additional deformation y 3 - y 2, calculated for ef = 0 A realistic calculation representing this load history should involve these three steps, including the relevant first order moments or eccentricities for each step. As a simplification, steps 1 and 2 can be combined into one, using a stress-strain diagram with the strains multiplied by (1+), see 6.4. This corresponds to line AC, and the calculation is then reduced to two steps. The last step can be calculated in two alternative ways: a. After calculating point C, the additional load Q D Q L is added, with deformation starting from y 2. See line CD in figure b. After calculating point C, the total load Q D is applied from scratch, but with y 0 = y 2 - y 1 as an initial deflection added to other first order effects. See line ED in figure Alternative b. will be used in two-step calculations in the following way. The distribution of y 0 along the column should in principle be the same as the distribution of y 2 y 1. For a pin-ended column, Page 5-20

71 Guide to EC2 Section 5 however, a sine-shaped or parabolic distribution will be adopted as a simplification. A further simplification is a one-step calculation, using an effective creep ratio ef; (line AD in the figure). For the definition of ef there are two main options: a) based on first order moments M 0L and M 0D, i.e. ef = M 0L / M 0D b) based on total moments M L and M D, including 2nd order moments, i.e. ef = M L / M D The relevant deformation parameter in second order analysis is curvature, which depends primarily on bending moment. Therefore, the axial load should not be included in the definition of effective creep ratio. Alternative b) is the most realistic one, since creep deformations will mainly be governed by total moments. With this alternative, however, iteration is inevitable since second order moments depend on stiffness, which depends on effective creep ratio, which depends on total moments etc. Therefore, alternative a) will be the normal choice in practical design. Alternative a. is always more or less on the safe side. The reason is that the second order moment is a non-linear function of the axial load. Therefore, the moment increase due to second order effects will be greater under design load than under long-term load, and the ratio M L/M D will be lower if second order moments are included. This is easy to verify with a magnification factor based on linear material behaviour (see chapter 5.8.7); this tendency will be even stronger in a non-linear analysis Comparison between one- and two-step calculations An example will be used to compare the one-step calculation, using the effective creep ratio, with the more realistic two-step calculation. A high slenderness ratio has been chosen, in order to emphasize the effects considered. All calculations below have been done with the general method. (for a general description and discussion of this method, see chapter 5.8.6). Geometric assumption are: - Concrete C40 - Reinforcement S500 - Rectangular cross section with reinforcement concentrated to opposite sides - Mechanical reinforcement ratio = 0,15 (total reinforcement) - Edge distance of reinforcement 0,1h - Eccentricity e 0 = 0,08h (same for long-term and design load; no other first order effect) - Slenderness l/h = 40 (= 139) - Basic creep coefficient = 3 In the following, all axial loads and bending moments are expressed in relative terms, i.e. n = N / A cf cd and m = M / ha cf cd. Therefore, no absolute dimensions are used. a): n L = 0,100 (long-term axial load) 1. immediate deformation, calculated with = 0: y 1/h = 0, total deformation, calculated with = 3: y 2/h = 0, creep deformation: y 0/h = 0,0819 0,0173 = 0,0646 y 0 is taken as an initial deflection with parabolic distribution, and is added to the constant first order eccentricity e 0 given above. The load capacity under this total first order effect and no creep ( = 0) is calculated. The result is n Rd = 0,235 b): n L = 0, y 1/h = 0,023 ( = 0) 2. y 2/h = 0,134 ( = 3) 3. y 0/h = 0,134 0,023 = 0,111 (creep deformation) The load capacity calculated with e 0+ y 0 and with = 0 is n Rd = 0,189 These values are compared to the result of a one-step calculation, using an effective creep ratio based on first order moments. a) n L = 0,100 ef = M 0L / M 0D = N L e 0 / (N D e0) = n L / n D = 3 0,100/0,235 = 1,28 6 The load capacity with ef = 1,28 is n Rd = 0,198 Cf. 0,235 in two-step calculation; thus the result is 16% conservative 5 A "curvature method", giving a fixed 2nd order moment, would lead to the wrong conclusion here. 6 In this particular example the first order moment is proportional to the axial load, therefore the effective creep ratio can be based on axial loads as well as moments. In the general case only moments should be used. Page 5-21

72 Guide to EC2 Section 5 b) n L = 0,125 ef = 3 0,125/0,189 = 1,98 n Rd = 0,166 Cf. 0,189 in two-step calculation; thus the result is 12 % conservative These results are somewhat conservative, as could be expected (the reason is explained above). Next is a one-step calculation with ef based on total moments. a) n L = 0,100 Total moment under n L is m L = n L (e 0 + y 2) = 0,100 (0,08 + 0,0819) = 0,0162 After iteration the following values are found: Total moment under design load m D = 0,0618 Effective creep ratio ef = m L / m D = 3 0,0162/0,0618 = 0,786 Load capacity with ef = 0,786 is n Rd = 0,224 (total moment for this load is m D = 0,0618) This is within 5 % of the two-step calculation (which gave n Rd = 0,235) b) n L = 0,125 Total moment under n L is m L = n L (e 0 + y 2) = 0,125 (0,08 + 0,134) = 0,0267 After iteration: m D = 0,0531, ef = m L / m D = 3 0,0267/0,0531 = 1,151, n Rd = 0,183 This is within 3 % of the two-step calculation (n Rd = 0,189) Conclusions It is conservative to use an effective creep ratio based on first order moments; total moments will give more accurate results. In practical design, however, total moments are much more complicated to use, however, since iteration will be necessary. Therefore, the normal procedure will be to use first order moments. This is further discussed below The effect of creep on slenderness limit The effect of creep on slenderness limit will be further studied here, comparing the one-step and two-steps methods according to and It is thus a complement to clause 3.1, dealing with the slenderness limit in general. It is also a complement to 4.3.2, dealing with creep combined with a high slenderness, since this clause deals with low slenderness ratios. Table 5.7 shows the results of calculations, based on a slenderness corresponding to the limit for which second order effects may be neglected with ef = 0, see 3.1. The basic parameters are the same as for the example in 4.3.2, except those for which different values are given. Table 5.7. The effect of creep for columns with a low slenderness. Symbols in table: e 02 the greater of the two first order eccentricities e 01 the lesser eccentricity l 0/h slenderness corresponding to the limit for 10 % moment increase at = 0 n relative normal force N/A cf cd n u0 load capacity for the current slenderness and = 0 n L long-term load effective creep ratio = n L / n 0; here = 3 has been assumed ef Page 5-22

73 Guide to EC2 Section 5 n u1 n u2 Comments load capacity including the effect of creep according to 1- step method load capacity including the effect of creep according to 2- step method The agreement between the 1-step and 2-steps methods is in most cases good. For e 01/e 02 = -0,9 (double curvature bending) the 1-step method is generally slightly conservative compared to the 2- steps method. There are also a few cases where the opposite is true, but in these cases the longterm load is close to the limit where instability would occur with ef =, and then the 2-steps method becomes uncertain. In these cases, the result would have been more representative with a somewhat lower long-term load. The use of an extended stress-strain diagram in the 2-steps method can be discussed. In principle it means that creep deformations will correspond to the stresses in the final stage. In a more accurate calculation they should be integrated from 0 to, with increasing second order moment. However, the error will be small, since the stresses are normally not very high under long-term load, and since second order moments are small at these low slenderness ratios. In most cases a first order eccentricity e 02/h = 0,32 has been used, with the aim of having a moderate normal force. For the sake of completeness, one case with a high normal force is also included (n u0 = 1,022, e 02/h = 0,08) and one with a low normal force (n u0 = 0,122, e 02/h = 1,28). Even with the low normal force, there is a significant effect of creep. (The 2-steps method in this case seems to give more effect of creep for low than for high normal force. This is misleading, however; it is a consequence of the long-term load being close to the instability load for ef =, see discussion in the first paragraph above.) Conclusion concerning the effect of creep on the slenderness limit In these examples, creep reduces the load capacity by 5 to 30% (average 15%). If second order moments are neglected, which is allowable at these slenderness ratios, the result is in principle already 10% on the unsafe side. If creep would also be neglected, the results would be another 5 to 30% on the unsafe side. The conclusion is that creep can not be neglected in the slenderness limit Safety under long-term load only The effective creep ratio is based on moments under quasi-permanent load which, according to its definition in EN 1990, is an SLS load with no load factors (except 2 < 1 for variable loads). Thus, in the extreme case of permanent load only, assuming first order moments proportional to the load as in the above examples, the highest possible effective creep ratio is ef = M 0L/M 0D = 1,0/1,35 = 0,74 The following question now arises: Can load N L together with ef = be more severe than N D = 1,35 N L with ef = 0,74? The example in is used again. The load capacity for ef = 0,74 = 2,22 is found to be n Rd = 0,159. The corresponding long-term load is n L = 0,159 / 1,35 = 0,118. The load capacity for full creep, ef = = 3, is found to be n RdL = 0,141. This is higher than the current long term load, and the safety factor is L = 0,141/0,118 = 1,19 This safety factor may be considered somewhat low, although it should be observed that it is not the whole safety factor as the normal material safety factors are already included in the calculated capacities. A reasonable lower limit for the load safety factor could be 1,35. As shown above, it is conservative to use an effective creep ratio based on first order moments. The extra safety can be estimated by comparison with more accurate calculations, e.g. a two-step calculation or a one-step calculation with ef based on total moments. A two-step calculation according to the above scheme is done with different values of n L, until a value is found for which n Rd = 0,159. This happens for n L = 0,134. Thus, one could say that the additional built-in safety is 0,134/0,118 = 1,14, and the total safety against creep failure would be L = 1,14 1,19 = 1,36 This is considered to be sufficient, and it can be shown that this factor will be higher for lower values of slenderness, higher first order moments and higher amounts of reinforcement. In this respect, the current example is rather extreme, in the unfavourable direction. Furthermore, long-term load = 74 % of design load is the worst possible case for consideration of the effect of creep. In normal cases there is always some variable load. The percentage of longterm Page 5-23

74 Guide to EC2 Section 5 load then decreases, since variable loads are included in Q L with 2 Q k, where 2 < 1 8, whereas in Q D they are included with Q Q k, where Q > 1. Therefore, the more variable the load, the higher the safety against creep failure will be. The conclusion is that a one-step calculation, using an effective creep ratio based on first order moments, will give sufficient safety against failure under quasi-permanent load with full creep. Therefore, this case need not be checked separately, and it is not necessary to include any safety factor on M 0L in the definition of ef. In (3) the alternative of using total moments in the definition of effective creep ratio is given. This is less conservative, however, and most of the extra safety against creep failure is then lost. Therefore, (3) states that a separate check should then be made for 1,35 Q L and with ef =. This may become the governing factor in cases where the percentage of long-term moment is moderate or high, more precisely when first order moment ratio M 0L / M 0D > 0, Methods of analysis General method C Methods of analysis Three basic methods are described in Of the simplified methods, (b) is basically the model column method in the ENV, with some modifications. The old name is not used here, since it tells nothing about the method (all methods are based on models). A more suitable name is curvature method, since the method is based on the estimation of a curvature. This name will be used here, together with stiffness method for method (a), which is based on the estimation of stiffness. There are simplified methods other than those mentioned in EC2. One such method, combining analysis and cross section design in one step, will be shortly described here as an example (it is currently used in the Swedish code). It can be used for isolated columns with formally centric load, i.e. no other first order effect than the prescribed imperfection. The load bearing capacity is given as N Rd = k cf cda c + k sf yda s (5-1) where k c and k s are coefficients depending on slenderness ratio, imperfection, concrete grade, effective creep ratio etc, calibrated against calculations with the general method. A method of this type works ideally if the imperfection, an eccentricity or an initial deflection, is proportional to the buckling length of the column. This is the case in some codes, but not in the Eurocodes. If the imperfection is proportional to the effective length, the coefficients can be given in one simple table or diagram with slenderness as the basic parameter. If the imperfection is not proportional to the effective length, then the absolute value of this length must be added as a separate parameter, which complicates the presentation (for example, one diagram or table would only be valid for one length). However, with some simplifications this type of method could be useful also under EN 1992, particularly for storey high pin-ended columns, which are common as interior columns in buildings. If there are first order moments other than that due to the imperfection, a separate design for normal force and (magnified) moment must be made. A special moment magnification factor is included in the method for such cases, but the simplicity is lost and the method no longer has any particular advantages over the stiffness or curvature methods in EC2. In the following chapters, the general method and the simplified methods (a) and (b) are described. C General method General The most accurate of the methods described in is the general method. It is based on nonlinear analysis, including both material and geometric non-linearity (second order effects). General here refers to the fact that the method can be used for any type of cross section, any variation of cross section, axial load and first order moment, any boundary conditions, any stressstrain relations, uniaxial or biaxial bending etc. The limiting factor is the capability of the available computer program. The method rests on a few simple assumptions: linear strain distribution equal strains in reinforcement and concrete at the same level stress-strain relationships for concrete and steel 8 EN 1990 gives values for 2. For some loads, e.g. wind, 2 = 0. A common value is 0,3 (office and residential areas). The highest value given is 0,8.can be based on axial loads as well as moments. In the general case only moments should be used. Page 5-24

75 Guide to EC2 Section 5 Conditions of equilibrium and deformation compatibility are satisfied in a number of cross sections, and the deflection is calculated by double integration of the curvature, having an assumed variation between the selected sections. This may be self-evident, but it is mentioned in (6) as a reference for a simplified version, in which only one cross section (or certain critical sections) is studied, and the curvature is pre-assumed to have a certain variation in other parts of the member. This gives simpler computer programs and faster calculation, but less accuracy. See figure Figure Illustration of accurate (left) and simplified (right) versions of the general method Any stress-strain relations can be used. A continuous curve with a descending branch is considered to be the most realistic alternative for the concrete; it is also convenient for computational reasons. Creep can be considered in different ways; the simplest way is to multiply all concrete strains by (1+ ef), see clause 6.4. Tension stiffening (i.e. the contribution from concrete in tension between cracks) can easily be taken into account in the general method, e.g. by using a descending branch of the concrete stressstrain curve in tension, by modifying the stress-strain curve of the reinforcement or by any other suitable model. In the calculations presented in this report, however, all contributions from concrete in tension have been ignored; this is always more or less conservative Safety format The safety format in non-linear analysis has been much debated, and different models have been proposed. The safety format is particularly important in second order analysis, where the absolute magnitude of deformations has a direct influence on the ultimate load. 9 The safety format should satisfy two basic criteria. 1. It should be possible to use the same set of material parameters in all parts of the member, in order to avoid discontinuities and computational problems. The model in ENV (Appendix 2) does not comply with this, since it assumes mean values of material parameters for the calculation of deformations and design values for the check of resistance in critical sections. This also means that there will be no material safety at all in the calculated resistance, in cases where failure occurs before reaching the design cross section resistance (stability failure) unless critical section is substituted by some critical length (which then remains to be defined, however). 2. The safety format should be compatible with the general design format based on partial safety factors. The model in ENV (Appendix B) does not comply with this, since it uses mean values for the analysis and a global safety factor R = 1,3 to reduce the ultimate load resulting from the analysis. This gives the same results as using design values fcm/1,3, fyk/1,3, Ecm/1,3 and Esm/1,3. Thus, it makes no difference whether the ultimate load is governed by concrete or steel, resistance or stiffness. The reduction of the reinforcement strength is too severe, as is also the reduction of the material stiffness parameters, particularly for reinforcement (Esm/1,3). A non-linear analysis using this safety format will be conservative, and the potential benefits of using a refined method are lost. The safety format defined in 5.8.6, based on using design values in the analysis, satisfies both criteria. A design value of the ultimate load will be obtained as a direct result of the analysis, and the problems associated with the above-mentioned safety formats are avoided. Since the E-moduli vary less than the corresponding strengths, the partial safety factors given for E should be lower than for f: 9 The absolute magnitude can be of importance also in e.g. continuous beams, but only in the check of rotation capacity, and it would normally not have the same direct influence on the ultimate load as in 2nd order analysis. 10 This diagram is taken from [1], which primarily deals with high strength concrete according to Swedish rules, but this makes no difference for what the diagram is intended to show. Page 5-25

76 Guide to EC2 Section 5 For concrete, c = 1,5 for strength takes into account not only strength variation, but also geometrical deviations in the cross section. Assuming a factor 1,1 for these deviations, and considering the relationship between strength and E-modulus, a reasonable value of the factor for E c is ce = 1,1 (1,5/1,1)1/3 1,2. For steel, s = 1,15 includes a factor of about 1,05 for geometrical deviations. Thus, a design value E sd=e sm/1,05 would be logical, considering the fact that variations in the E-modulus are negligible. However, a factor 1,0 has been chosen as a simplification, and in order not to deviate from 3.2.3; differences in terms of calculated result are negligible Interaction diagrams The resistance of slender columns resulting from a general analysis can be shown in a practical form with interaction curves, figure One such curve shows the maximum first order moment M0 (or eccentricity e 0 = M 0/N) for a certain axial load N. The thin curves in figure 5.25 show the total moment M as a function of N for a given e 0. The higher the slenderness, the more the total moment M increases over the first order moment M 0. (Note that the diagram gives axial load and moment in relative terms n and m.) One point on the interaction curve for a given slenderness is obtained by plotting the maximum value of n on the line representing m 0 or e 0. This is demonstrated in figure 5.25 for one relative eccentricity e 0/h = 0,1 and different slenderness values = 35, 70, 105 and 140. The difference M u - M 0 between the cross section resistance (curve = 0) and the first order moment at maximum load represents the second order moment. However, in some cases there is a stability failure before any cross section reaches its ultimate moment, and then the true second order moment is less than M u - M 0. This occurs for = 105 and 140 in figure This nominal second order moment M u - M 0 is useful as a basis for simplified methods; see clause 6.5 and chapters 7 and 8. Figure Interaction curves for columns of different slenderness, calculated with the general method. Rectangular cross section. n and m0 are relative axial force and first order moment respectively, i.e. n = N / bhfcd, m0 = M0/bh 2 fcd. All curves are based on = 0,2 and ef = 0. Concrete grade is C First order moment is constant, e.g. caused by equal end eccentricities The effect of creep Creep can be taken into account in different ways. The most accurate model would be to increase load and time in steps, for each step taking the stresses, strains (and corresponding deflections) from the previous step as starting values for the next increment. For each step, strains would be calculated taking into account their time-dependence. A simplified model is to multiply all strain values in the concrete stress-strain function with the factor (1+ ef), see figure 5.26, where ef is an effective creep ratio relevant for the load considered. With this model, the analysis can be made either in steps for loads of different duration, or directly for the design load combination in one step, see chapter 4. For creep in slender members in particular, see clause 4.3. Figure Simple way of taking into account creep in general method Page 5-26

77 Guide to EC2 Section 5 Figure 5.27 is calculated in this way, using ef = 2,0 and other parameters the same as in figure Curves according to figure 5.25 are also included (dashed), showing the reduction of the load capacity resulting from creep. The relative reduction increases with slenderness. Figure Interaction curves for ef = 2. Other parameters are the same as in figure 5.25 Dashed curves are the corresponding curves from figure 6-2, i.e. for ef = 0. The difference represents the effect of creep Another question is whether one and the same effective creep ratio should be used along a compression member (or in different parts of a structure), or if it should vary as the ratio M Eqp/M Ed may vary. The latter would be the most correct alternative, but normally it is reasonable to use one representative value of ef for a member or even a whole structure Simplified methods and their common basis In a simplified calculation method one can use the difference between cross section resistance and first order moment, M u - M 0 in figure 5.25, as a nominal second order moment. When this moment is added to the first order moment, a design moment is obtained for which the cross section can be designed with regard to its ultimate resistance. As pointed out above, this nominal second order moment is sometimes greater than the true second order moment. However, it can give correct end results, even in cases where the load capacity is governed by a stability failure before reaching the cross section resistance, if given appropriate values. For practical design, there are two principal methods to calculate this nominal second order moment: 1. estimation of the flexural stiffness EI to be used in a linear second order analysis (i.e. considering geometrical non-linearity but assuming linear material behaviour); this method is here called stiffness method, see chapter estimation of the curvature 1/r corresponding to a second order deflection for which the second order moment is calculated; this method is here called curvature method, see chapter Before entering into details of the two methods in chapters and 5.8.8, their common basis will be shortly described. The total moment including second order moment for a simple isolated member is: where (see figure 5.28) M = total moment M 0 = first order moment M 2 = second order moment N = axial force y = deflection corresponding to 1/r 1/r = curvature corresponding to y l = length c = factor for curvature distribution 2 1 l M M0 M2 M0 N y M0 N r c (6-1) Page 5-27

78 Guide to EC2 Section 5 Figure Illustration of deformations and moments in a pin-ended column. (In the figure, first order moment is exemplified as the effect of a transverse load. First order moment could also be given by eccentricity of the axial load.) The difference between the two methods lies in the formulation of the curvature 1/r. In the stiffness method 1/r is expressed in terms of an estimated nominal flexural stiffness EI: 1 M = r EI The stiffness EI should be defined in such a way that ULS cross section design for the total moment M will give an acceptable end result in comparison with the general method. This includes, among other things, taking account of cracking, creep and non-linear material properties. In the curvature method, the curvature 1/r is estimated directly, on the basis of assuming yield strain in tensile and compressive reinforcement: 1 2yd = r 0,9d This model overestimates the curvature in those cases where yielding is not reached, giving a too conservative end result. The typical example is where the ultimate load is governed by stability failure, before reaching the cross section resistance. The model may also underestimate the curvature in some cases, since it does not take into account creep. However, various corrections can be introduced to improve the result. In the following chapters the two simplified methods will be described and compared to the general method. (6-2) (6-3) Method based on nominal stiffness General Nominal stiffness Moment magnification factor C Method based on stiffness Basic equations A simple isolated column is considered, e.g. pin-ended with a length l = l 0; see figure The second order moment can be expressed in the following way, c f. equation (6-1) and fig. 5.28: l M l 0 M0 M 2 M 2 =Ny =N N (7-1) r c EI c c0 c2 With c 0 and c 2 it is possible to consider different distributions of first and second order moments (primarily the corresponding curvatures). Solving for M 2 gives 2 l0 N cei 0 c 2 c 0 M2 M0 M 2 0 (7-2) 2 l0 c2ei l0n1 1 N c 0 EI In many cases it is reasonable to assume that the second order moment has a sine shaped distribution. This corresponds to c 2 = 2, and M 2 can then be written 2 / c0 M 2 =M 0 =M (7-3) EI / l -1 N B / N- 1 0 where N B = nominal buckling load (based on nominal stiffness). = 2 /c 0, parameter taking into account the distribution of first order moment The total moment will be M=M 0 1+ N N- which corresponds to equation (5.28) in / 1 B (7-4) Page 5-28

79 Guide to EC2 Section Moment distribution In some cases the value of c 0 is known, as in the examples mentioned in (2). The case of differing end moments will be examined more closely. A reference is made to (2), with the well-known formula for an equivalent constant first order moment: This is illustrated in figure M 0e = 0,6 M ,4 M 01 0,4 M 02 (7-5) Figure Illustration of equivalent moments in case of differing end moments Equation (7-4) can be used with the equivalent first order moment according to (7-5) also. An example of the result is shown in figure 7-2, where two different c 0 values were used: 8 and 10 respectively. Figure Slender member with differing end moments according to figure 7-1 with e02/h = M02/Nh = 0,1 and NB/N = 2: Comparison between maximum moment according to exact solution and equivalent first order moment (7-5) with magnification factor (7-4). Thick line = exact solution. Upper thin line = equivalent moment with c0 = 8 Lower thin line = equivalent moment with c0 = 10 Figure 5.30 shows good agreement with the exact solution for c 0 = 8, whereas for c 0 = 10 slightly unsafe results may arise. Therefore c 0 = 8 is recommended in (2); this is also consistent with the assumption of a constant equivalent first order moment. The example is based on a comparatively high second order effect (N/N B = 0,5), which enhances the differences. In many cases it is reasonable to assume that first and second order moments have similar distributions, in which case 1. Equation (7-4) can then be simplified to M 0 M= (7-6) N N- / 1 B This corresponds to equation (5.30) in It can be shown that this expression can be used also for structures, provided a global buckling load can be defined. See for global analysis of structures. Page 5-29

80 Guide to EC2 Section Estimation of stiffness The maximum first order moment M 0 for different axial forces, slenderness ratios, and reinforcement ratios can be determined using the general method, see chapter The values thus obtained can be considered the correct ones. With the stiffness method, on the other hand, the maximum first order moment can be expressed on the basis of equation (7-4), assuming that the total moment is equal to the ultimate moment resistance M u for the normal force N: Mu Mu M0 1 1 N N EI l N B The following is a simple model for the stiffness, expressed as the sum of separate contributions from concrete and reinforcement: where E c, E s = concrete and steel E-moduli respectively (7-7) EI=K c E c I c + K s E s I s (7-8) I c, I s = moment of inertia of concrete and steel area The correction factors K c and K s can be calibrated using more or less sophisticated models, to give the required agreement between expression (7-7) and the general method. In (2) basically two alternative models are given: a) (expr (5.22)) is a more accurate alternative, valid for reinforcement ratios down to = 0,002. b) (expr (5.26)) is a simplified alternative, valid only for reinforcement ratios 0,01. Thus, for < 0,01 only a) may be used, for 0,01 either method may be used. Ks 1 a) if p 0,002 (7-9) K k k / 1 b) if p 0,01 where where c c 1 2 ef Ks 1 K 0,3 / 1 0,5 ef (7-10) is the geometrical reinforcement ratio, A s/a c ef is the effective creep ratio, see chapter 4 k 1 depends on concrete strength class, see (7-11) k 2 depends on axial force and slenderness, see (7-12) k 1 = f ck / 20 (7-11) k 2 =n 0,20 (7-12) 170 n is the relative axial force, N Ed / (A cf cd) A c is the area of concrete cross section is the slenderness ratio, l 0/i For cases where is not defined, a simplified alternative to (7-12) is also given (5.25): k 2 = n 0,30 0,20 (7-13) More sophisticated models for estimating the stiffness can be found in [2] and [3]. Background, see [1]. The results of calculations with stiffness evaluated according to expressions (7-9) to (7-12) are presented in Appendix 2 of this report, in the form of comparison with calculations done using the general method. The Appendix also compares the curvature method; see chapter Linear analysis of structures Clause opens the possibility of using linear second order analysis for structures, using reduced stiffness(es) taking into account the effect of cracking, creep and material nonlinearity in a simplified way. Without this possibility, the only alternative for second order analysis of structures would be non-linear analysis. When global second order effects are significant, the effects of cracking etc. may be as important as for isolated members. It should also be kept in mind that second order effects may be significant in a structure, even if the geometrical slenderness of individual bracing units is small, in case the braced units carry a comparatively high vertical load. The paragraphs applicable to structures are (criterion for ignoring global second order effects), (3) and Annex H. Two different approaches can be distinguished, one based on a magnification factor for bending moments, (3), and the other one based on a similar factor for horizontal forces, H.2. Page 5-30

81 Guide to EC2 Section 5 The two approaches are basically the same, but the one based on moments is suitable mainly for structures with bracing units consisting of shear walls without significant global shear deformations, or structures braced by simple cantilever columns, see examples in figure Figure Example of structures where a magnification factor can be applied directly to bending moment(s) in bracing unit(s) The approach based on magnification of horizontal forces, on the other hand, can be used for all kinds of structures, and it should be used for frames, shear walls with large openings etc. If properly used, it gives the correct second order effects in structural systems like frames, shear walls with or without openings etc; see the schematic example in figure Figure Example of a structure where the magnification factor should be applied to horizontal forces rather than to bending moments. (No deformation is shown in this case, second order effects are instead assumed to be included in the fictitious, magnified horizontal force HEd.) Expressions (5.30) and (H.7) are useful if the global buckling load can be defined without difficulty, like in certain regular structures, see e.g and H.1. In other cases second order effects may be calculated step-wise as indicated for a simple frame in figure Figure Illustration of step-wise calculation of second order effects. a) Horizontal load H0 (without vertical load) gives deformation y0. b) Vertical load V on deformed structure gives additional deformation y1. c) H1 is an equivalent horizontal load that would give the same deformation y1. d) Vertical load V and deformation y1 give additional deformation y2. e) H2 is equivalent horizontal load giving the same deformation y2 etc... The total equivalent horizontal force is H = H 0 + H 1 + H 2 + H 3 + (7-14) If k i = H i/h i-1 is < 1, then the sum H will be finite (i.e. the structure is stable). With increasing number Page 5-31

82 Guide to EC2 Section 5 of steps, in a linear analysis, the ratio k i will sooner or later become constant. In other words, the following terms will form a geometric series. The simplest alternative is to assume that all terms, including H 0, will form a geometric series. The total equivalent horizontal force is then obtained as H0 H0 H= = 1-k 1 -H / H which is equivalent to expression (H.8) (7-15) Note. Expression (7-15), including the definition of k, can also be expressed in terms of y or a relevant M. It can also be shown that the final value of k is equal to the ratio V/V B, where V is the total vertical load and V B is the global buckling load. Thus, the method of stepwise calculation can be seen as just a different formulation or derivation of the method based on a magnification factor. If the distribution of H 1 is significantly different from that of H 0, the accuracy can be improved by including one or more steps: H H H=H +, H=H +H +... etc H2 / H1 1 -H3 / H2 (7-16) The simple alternative (7-15)/(H.8) is sufficiently accurate in most cases, compared to other uncertainties like the effect of stiffness variations within and between members due to cracking etc. It should be observed that variation in the degree of cracking between first and following steps does not have to be considered, if reduced stiffness values according to are used; these values are intended to be valid for the final stage of deformation. However, if values for uncracked section are used in early steps, although cracking might occur in later steps, then more steps have to be included in the analysis, like in expression (7-16); k-values for early steps would otherwise be too low for later steps. This would apply generally when a more refined analysis is used, where gradual cracking is taken into account. When the structure is analysed for the equivalent horizontal force H Ed, the relevant second order effects can be obtained everywhere in the structure. To magnify all moments with the same factor, as in expression (7-6)/(5.30), would not be correct in for instance a frame or a shear wall with large openings Method based on nominal curvature C Method based on curvature Basic relationships This method is basically the same as the previously so-called model column method in the ENV. The second order moment is expressed in the following way, cf. equation (6-1): 2 1 l0 M 2 =Ny =N (8-1) r c As mentioned in 6.5, 1/r is estimated on the basis of reaching yield strain in tensile and compressive reinforcement. Here correction factors K r and K are included: 1 1 2yd =Kr K =Kr K (8-2) r r0 0,9d In chapter an extended definition of the effective depth d has been introduced, in order to cover cases where there is no unambiguous definition of d; see figure 5.34 where i s is the radius of gyration of the total reinforcement area Figure 5.34.Effective depth in cross sections with reinforcement distributed in direction of bending In order to reduce the curvature in cases where yielding is not reached in the tensile reinforcement, a factor K r is introduced (same as K 2 in ENV , ): K r = (n u - n) / (n u - n bal) 1 (8-3) Page 5-32

83 Guide to EC2 Section Biaxial bending where n = N Ed / (A c f cd), relative normal force ( in the ENV) N Ed is design value of normal force n u = 1 + n bal is value of n at maximum moment resistance; the value 0,4 may be used = A s f yd / (A c f cd) A s is total area of reinforcement A c is area of concrete cross section There is another factor K 1 in ENV , (2), which reduces the curvature for values of between 15 and 35. The purpose of this factor was presumably to avoid discontinuity in cases where second order effects may be ignored. However, second order effects will often be ignored for between 25 and 35 (see ), so discontinuities will still occur. Furthermore, independent of method, there is always a basic discontinuity following from the rule that second order effects may be ignored if they are below a certain limit. For these reasons, the factor K 1 has not been included in The ENV gives no indication of how to take into account creep in the model column method. Comparisons with the general method indicate that in certain cases the method can give unsafe results if allowance for creep is not considered, and the factor K has been introduced for this purpose. It has been calibrated against calculations with the general method. More sophisticated models for estimating the curvature can be found in [2] and [3]. Their background is presented in [1]. Comparison with general method and stiffness method The result of calculations with curvature according to expressions (8-1) to (8-3) is presented in Appendix 2, in comparison with calculations based on the general method. In the same Appendix calculations with the stiffness method (chapter 7) are also presented and compared. Using the curvature method for structures In there is an indication that the curvature method can be used also for structures, with proper assumptions concerning the distribution of curvature. This statement is based on [4], where a method is given by which the curvature method can be used also for second order analysis and design of unbraced frames. For details, see [4]. C Biaxial bending The general method is suitable for biaxial bending also. The same principles as in uniaxial bending apply, although the complexity of the problem increases. Simplified methods like the stiffness or curvature method can also be used. They are then used separately for each direction, and if the resulting bending moments fulfil a certain criterion, given in expression (5.38), no further action is necessary. The criterion in (5.38) is similar to expressions (4.74) and (4.75) in the ENV, , but there is one important difference: the ENV check concerns only first order eccentricities, whereas in it concerns total eccentricities including second order effects. The reason for including the second order effects is illustrated in figure 5.35: Figure Example of member with different slenderness in the two directions Assume for example = 100 in one direction and = 20 in the other. Second order effects will then be significant in one direction but negligible in the other. A and B are two examples of the position of the axial load, both fulfilling the criterion for separate checks according to the ENV, based on first order eccentricities. This would be acceptable for case A, since the second order effect will make the total eccentricities even less biaxial. It is not acceptable for case B, however, since the second order effect will now give total eccentricities outside the permissible area. Thus, a first order criterion can be misleading and unsafe. If criterion (5.38) is not fulfilled, the cross section should be designed for biaxial bending. A simple Page 5-33

84 Guide to EC2 Section 5 model for this, in the absence of an accurate cross section analysis, is given in 6.1: 5.9 Lateral instability of slender beams a a M M x y M Rx M Ry where M x/y design moment in the respective direction, including nominal 2nd order moment M Rx/y corresponding moment resistance of cross section a exponent The values of the exponent a are taken from a UK proposal based on [5]. The exponent has been slightly adjusted according to [6]. These values can be used in the absence of more accurate values. C5.9. Lateral instability of slender beams Compared to the ENV, the following changes have been made: 1. It is clearly stated that the check of lateral instability of beams is relevant in situations where lateral bracing is lacking. For beams in finished structures, lateral instability is normally prevented by lateral bracing from adjacent members (e.g. floor or roof elements). 2. A lateral deflection l/300 has been introduced as an imperfection to be used in calculations concerning lateral instability and balance at supports. 3. The criterion for neglecting second order effects is different. It is explained and compared to the ENV below. Expression (5.40) is based on a numerical study [7]. It is technically equivalent to the corresponding criterion in the new DIN 1045 [8], but it has a different mathematical formulation to show the main parameters l/b and h/b more clearly. Figure 5.36 shows a comparison according to [7] between the numerical results and expression (5.40). The corresponding criterion according to the ENV is also shown. It is quite clear that the ENV criterion does not represent the numerical results very well; it is too conservative in many cases and unsafe in other cases. The DIN model is much better. 1 (9-1) 5.10 Prestressed members and structures 5.11 Analysis for some particular structural members Figure Criteria for ignoring second order effects in beams according to ENV and EN in comparison with numerical results [7] In the final version, a distinction between persistent and transient design situations has been introduced, together with an additional criterion for h/b; this is based on national comments Prestressed members and structures See example Analysis for some particular structural members No specific comment on this part. Appendix 1. Verification of new model for slenderness limit Variables covered: Concrete grade: C20, C40, C80 Page 5-34

85 Guide to EC2 Section 5 Reinforcement ratio: = 0,1 and 0,5 (for C40 also = 0,3) Effective creep ratio: ef = 0 and 2 (for C40 and = 0,3 also ef = 1) Explanations to diagrams: Horizontal axis: relative normal force n Vertical axis: slenderness limit lim Full curves: 10%-criterion, alternative 1 Dashed curves: 10%-criterion, alternative 2 Thick grey curves: new proposal for slenderness limit Concrete C20 Concrete C40 Page 5-35

86 Guide to EC2 Section 5 Concrete C80 Appendix 2. Calibration of simplified methods A2.1 Main calculations and results Calculations have been made for isolated columns with the following variables: The total number of individual cases is = 972 (not including = 0 and e 0 = 0). For each case, calculations have been made with the general method according to and with the simplified methods, i.e. the stiffness and curvature methods according to and respectively. The results are summarized in table A2-1 on the following two pages. The vertical axes in the diagrams represent the ratio Maximum first order moment according to simplified method Maximum first order moment according to general method The moment ratio is given with the mean value m and with m+s and m-s respectively, where s is standard deviation. The mean value (and standard deviation) for a certain value of the independent variable includes all the values for the other variables. Thus, for one value of e.g. the slenderness, the mean value and standard deviation of the moment ratio represent 972/4 = 243 individual values; for one value of the eccentricity 972/9 = 108 values etc. The horizontal axes represent the main variables: slenderness, eccentricity e 0/h, reinforcement ratio (both and ), concrete strength f ck and effective creep ratio ef. Interaction diagrams have also been prepared, covering all the above-mentioned cases and including the different methods and alternatives. However, to present all these diagrams would require too much space, and it would be difficult to obtain an overall view of the results. Therefore, only two such diagrams will be shown to illustrate certain aspects. 12 In [1] the simplified methods are compared with the general method also for columns with circular cross section and with a different distribution of the first order moment. Although [1] deals with more refined versions of the stiffness and curvature methods, the main conclusion is that the same models, as for rectangular section and constant moment, can be used also for other cross sections and variations of the first order moment. Page 5-36

87 Guide to EC2 Section 5 Table 5.A2-1. Summary of comparisons between simplified methods and general method Table 5.A2-1, continued Page 5-37

88 Guide to EC2 Section 5 A2.2 Discussion All the simplified methods show a rather wide scatter when compared to the general method. This is inevitable; a method giving close agreement with the general method over a wide range of parameter values would no longer be simple. An illustration is given in figure A2-1. The curvature method gives reasonable results for low to moderate slenderness, but becomes extremely conservative for high slenderness ratios. This is because the factor K r (K 2 in ENV) gives no reduction of the curvature at all when n < 0,4, and for high values n is practically always < 0,4. The same is true for the simplest version of the stiffness method (expr. 5.26). With correction of the stiffness for normal force and slenderness, expression (5.22) to (5.24), the result is much improved. It is difficult to calibrate a simple method so that it accurately follows the general method, particularly for high slenderness ratios and small eccentricities. This is true for all methods, see the first and second rows of diagrams in table A2-1. In figure A2-1 there is no effect of creep ( ef = 0). Figure A2-2 shows the corresponding curves for ef = 2 (a comparatively high value). Two sets of curves are given for the curvature method. The upper curves are based on K = 1, corresponding to the method in ENV , , where there is no effect of creep. The lower curves are based on K according to expression (5.37). Without effect of creep (= ENV), the curvature method is consistently unsafe for low and moderate slenderness. This can be seen also in the third column of diagrams in table A2-1. With K according to expression (5.37), creep is well taken into account. Page 5-38

89 Guide to EC2 Section 5 References [1] Westerberg, B: Design Methods for Slender Concrete Columns. Tyréns Technical Report 1997:1. Stockholm, September [2] FIP Recommendations, Practical Design of Structural Concrete. fib (CEB-FIP), September [3] Design Handbook for High Performance Concrete Structures. Handbook published in Sweden, [4] Beeby, A W and Narayanan, R S: Designers Handbook to Eurocode 2, Part 1.1. Thomas Telford, London, [5] Bresler, B: Design Criteria for Reinforced Columns under Axial Load and Biaxial Bending. ACI Journal, November [6] Whittle, R T and Lawson, R: Biaxial bending with axial compression. An investigation into the use of Bresler coefficients for determining the capacity of reinforced concrete sections under combined axial compression and biaxial bending. March 2000 [7] König, G and Pauli, W: Nachweis der Kippstabilität von schlanken Fertigteilträgern aus Stahlbeton und Spannbeton. Beton- und Stahlbetonbau 87 (1992) [8] Hellesland, J: On column slenderness limits. Mechanics Division, University of Oslo, Page 5-39

90 Guide to EC2 Section 5 Page 5-40

91 Guide to EC2 Section 6 SECTION 6 ULTIMATE LIMIT STATES (ULS) 6.1 Bending with or without axial force SECTION 6 ULTIMATE LIMIT STATES (ULS) C6.1 Bending with or without axial force Determining the compression resultant and its position compared to the edge of maximum deformation in case of rectangular section Two cases should be distinguished: e) real neutral axis (x h) f) virtual neutral axis (x > h) Real neutral axis a1) Diagram parabola exponential rectangle The resultant C of the block of compressive forces related to a rectangle of width b and depth x is expressed by C = 1 f cd b x and its position, measured starting from the edge where the strain is cu2, is defined by 2 x. The formulae of 1 and 2, in function of strain c, are: ( ) 1 cu2 cu 2 0 f cd d c cu2 2( cu2) 1 cu 2 0 cu2 ( ) d c cu 2. ( ) d 0 c The numeric values of 1 and 2 are shown in function of f ck in Table 6.1. In all tables limit the number of decimals to 3 maximum e.g. 0,80952 = 0,810 etc. Table 6.1.Values of 1 and 2 fck (N/mm 2 ) up to , , , , , , , , , , , ,35294 a2) Rectangular diagram With the combined effect of the and factors recalled in Chapt , the following values result: 1 = 2 = /2 the values are shown in Table 6.2. Table 6.2. Values of 1 and 2 for rectangular diagram fck (N/mm 2 ) up to , , , , , , , , , , , ,35000 b) Virtual neutral axis b1) Parabola exponential rectangle diagram With reference to Fig. 6.1, where ' = x/h the maximum and minimum strain at the section, respectively t and b (top and bottom) are given by the formulae ' c2 t c2 ' 1 cu2 1 b 1 t ' Page 6-1

92 Guide to EC2 Section 6 Figure 6.1. Rectangular section with virtual neutral axis Indicating respectively by 1t and 2t the resultant and its position about the whole length x and by 1b and 2b the similar quantities about the x-h part, the resultant 3 and its position 4 compared to the most compressed edge and in relation with depth h are given by: ' ( ' 1) 3 1t 1b 2 ' 1t 2t ( ' 1) 1b (( ' 1) 2b 1) 4 3 The 3 and 4 values for a number of x/h ratios are given in Table 6.3. Table and 4 values parabola rectangle costitutive law x h fck = 50 N/mm fck = 55 N/mm fck = 60 N/mm fck = 70 N/mm fck = 80 N/mm fck = 90 N/mm ,00 0, , , , , , , , , , , , ,20 0, , , , , , , , , , , , ,40 0, , , , , , , , , , , , ,60 0, , , , , , , , , , , , ,80 0, , , , , , , , , , , , ,00 0, , , , , , , , , , , , ,50 0, , , , , , , , , , , , ,00 0, , , , , , , , , , , ,49057 b2) Rectangular diagram In this case (x h) EC2 does not give instructions. It is nevertheless possible to write a formula that * x-h gives the equivalent depth h* in relation with x, so that it results h = h where the k a factor is x-kh determined by imposing that for x = h is h* = h. It results: 1 k=2- so that the equivalent depth h* is obtained from the expression: * x-h h = h 1 x-(2- ) h Values of,, k are given in function of f ck in Table 6.4. Table 6.4. Values of,, k fck (N/mm 2 ) k 50 0, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,57143 As an application, the values of 3 and of 4 were calculated in analogy to that was developed for case b1). The resulting values are given in Table 6.5. Page 6-2

93 Guide to EC2 Section 6 Table and 4 values for rectangular diagram Rectangular costitutive law x fck = 50 N/mm 2 h 3 4 fck = 55 N/mm fck = 60 N/mm fck = 70 N/mm fck = 80 N/mm fck = 90 N/mm ,00 0, , , , , , , , , , , , ,20 0, , , , , , , , , , , , ,40 0, , , , , , , , , , , , ,60 0, , , , , , , , , , , , ,80 0, , , , , , , , , , , , ,00 0, , , , , , , , , , , , ,50 0, , , , , , , , , , , , ,00 0, , , , , , , , , , , , Calculation of strength of rectangular section Determination of N Rd and M Rd Given a transverse rectangular section with symmetrical geometry and reinfocement, the reinforcing bars, the materials and the line that defines the deformed configuration at ultimate limit states, the design normal force and the design bending moment are determined about the centroidal axis. Figure 6.2. Rectangular section at ultimate limit state On the hypothesis that straight sections remain straight, deformation are as in fig On the basis of their level from the stress-strain diagrams of concrete and steel, the corresponding stresses are calculated. In order to determine N Rd and M Rd two equations of equilibrium (horizontal shift and rotation) are written. Equilibrium to shift: if N c is the resultant of compressive stresses applied to concrete, N s the resultant of stresses applied to the compressed reinforcing bars A s and N s the resultant of traction in the reinforcing bars A s, N Rd = N c + N s - N s The single terms can be developed as: N c =-b 1xf cd N s = -' sa s N s = sa s In particular fyd ' s =' se s if ' s < E s where d' ' s cu1 x fyd ' s = f yd if ' s Es likewise fyd s = se s if s < E s where d s cu 1 x fyd s = f yd if s Es The design bending moment about the centroidal axis is expressed as (6.1) (6.2) Page 6-3

94 Guide to EC2 Section 6 h ' h h MRd N c( 2x) A' s s ( d') A ss( d') In case both the reinforcing bars are yielded ( s = ' s = f yd ),: N Rd = -b 1xf cd - A' sf yd + A sf yd h MRd 1xbf cd( 2x) (As A' s )f yd(dd') 2 1 and 2 are factors given in Tables 6.1 or Design of reinforcing bars in case of bending without axial force and in case of bending with great eccentricity axial force Let's take a transversal section with axis of symmetry y (Fig. 6.3) and load effects in the plane of symmetry. Given the design load effects at ultimate limit state M Ed and N Ed, the bending moment about the tension reinforcement is calculated: M Esd = M Ed - N Ed y s and the reinforcement area A s required by M Esd is calculated like in the case of simple bending moment. The axial force N Ed is taken into account subsequently, by correcting of an equivalent quantity the resistance of the tensioned reinforcement steel. In such cases, the applied axial force must be taken into account with its sign: if N Ed is a compression force, it will reduce the area of tensioned steel. (6.3) Figure 6.3. Simple bending moment and composite bending moment with great eccentricity A general rule is adopted: only the tensioned steel (A s ) is provided, and only in case the tensioned steel is not sufficient, some compressed steel (A' s ) is added. In order to ensure that the structure has a ductile behaviour, the strain s of the tensioned steel must be greater that the strain corresponding to the limit of elasticity, that is s yd = f yd/e s. This implies that the neutral axis does not exceed the depth cu xlim d cu where cu is the strain at the compressed end. This limitations is valid for isostatic members; for other cases, other limitations apply (see note). The value of cu depends exclusively on the concrete class. The cu2 (for parabola and exponential rectangle diagram) and cu3 (for bilateral and uniform) values are identical [Table 3.1-EC2]. The yd value depends on the steel design stress f yd = f yk s. If M Esd is greater than the moment M lim, that corresponds to x lim in presence of tensioned reinforcement only, a certain amount of compressed steel has to be put in place. The difference yd M Esd = M Esd - M lim is to be absorbed by two sets of reinforcement, one compressed and one tensioned, of area ' MEsd A s =, which both work at the design limit of elasticity. f (d-d) ' yd The area of reinforcement steel, A s, has to be added to the section A s corresponding to the limit bending moment. Note The procedure exposed in the general guidelines follows from the principle of committing, as far as possible, compression to concrete and traction to steel. More severe limitations of x than those above- are required in order to meet ductility requirements in the case of indeterminate structures in bending, where redistribution of moments may take place. Page 6-4

95 Guide to EC2 Section 6 Moreover, both in statically indeterminate and determinate cases, the verification of serviceability tensional stresses [7.2(2)-EC2] implicitly requires that the depth of neutral axis at ultimate limit state is limited. In the design process point [ (1-EC2] must also be taken into account requiring a minimal quantity of tensioned reinforcement steel to avoid that fragility situations arise side steel. In other words, it's necessary that the resisting bending moment of the reinforced section is greater than the moment that causes cracking Rectangular section Use of parabola-rectangle and exponential-rectangle stress-strain relations Design is simple if the 1 and 2 values (respectively the resultant and its distance from the edge, for an element of unitary width and depth), given at point 7.2, are used. Given the section dimensions (b, h, d, effective depth defined as distance of the tensioned reinforcement steel centroid from the compressed edge), materials and action effects, the bending moment (Fig. 6.3) about the tensioned reinforcement elements is calculated: M Esd = M Ed N Ed.y s. In order to determine if A s is sufficient, or if also A' s is necessary, the following procedure is followed: x lim is determined the limit bending moment M Rd,lim with tensioned reinforcement only is calculated M Rd,lim = F c z lim where F c = 1 b x lim f cd is the resultant of compression stresses and z lim = (d- 2 x lim) is the inner lever arm. a) If M Esd is smaller than M rd,lim, A s alone is needed. In order to determine it the value of x corresponding to M Esd must be defined. It results: 1 b x f cd (d- 2 x) = M Esd which, developed, becomes: 2 d MEsd x x 0 bf Solving: cd d d MEsd x 2 2 bf cd Remembering that M Esd = A s f yd z, with z = (d- 2 x), finally MEsd As f z As F c must be equal and contrary to F t, the resultant of traction of the reinforcement steel A s, it can also be determined by: A s = 1 b x f cd/f yd If M Esd is greater than M Rd,lim, some reinforcement steel A' s in compression is needed. To calculate it, M Esd = M Esd - M Rd,lim. from which: MEsd A' s f (d d') yd The tensioned reinforcement is: 1 M Rd,lim A N A' fyd zlim s Ed s In such cases M Esd must be sensibly smaller than M Rd,lim, viz. it must not distort the problem. yd Page 6-5

96 Guide to EC2 Section Rectangular diagram of concrete stresses With reference to Fig. 6.4, y = x is the depth of the compressed zone and f cd is the design tensile stress. Values of the and factors are given in Table 6.4. It results: F c= b y f cd z = (d y/2) M Rd = F c z = b y f cd (d - y/2) Rearranging: Figure 6.4. Rectangular section with rectangular concrete stress diagram 2 y y 2MEsd d d b.d ( f ) with the solution cd y 2 MEsd d b d ( f ) cd Also in this case, the considerations and developments of the previous point apply T-sections Two situations can arise in T-sections: the neutral axis is in the flange: no difference as if the section was rectangular; the neutral axis crosses the web: its determination and the subsequent developments are simple if the rectangular stress diagram provided for at paragraph [3.1.7(3)-EC2] is adopted. An approximate method is also presented General method Introduction As very high values of resisting moments can be reached with T-sections, especially if medium/high strength concrete is used, the tensioned reinforcement steel should be laid on two layers, each one of area A s. The upper layer will have distance d from the compressed edge so that, as this reinforcement layer will have at least strain yd, the lower layer is also surely yielded. In some cases, a lower bulb for the placement of tensioned reinforcement steel could be needed. The rectangular stress diagram is adopted for calculation. The block of compressive stresses is defined by a uniform value f cd and by the extension y = x where and are two factors lower than 1 and function of f ck according to the formulae [3.19 to 3.22-EC2]. Values of and are given in Table 2.3. In case of simple bending moment, the equilibrium to rotation between external and internal moment is written with reference to the layer that corresponds to half way between the reinforcement layers A s (steel reinforcement centroid). In this way the contributions of the two tensioned reinforcement layers do not appear in the equation. The position of the neutral axis is determined through this equation. Then, the reinforcement elements are determined by equilibrium to shifting. In case of bending with axial force the reference layer of bending moments M* (sum of the given moment and of the one deriving from the shifting of the force N Ed) will still be the aboveindicated one. In this case the equilibrium to shifting, that is used to determine A s, also contain N Ed. Procedure With reference to Fig. 6.5 y is assumed as the basic parameter. M* is the given bending moment about the A s reinforcement centroid. s is the distance of this centroid from the concrete compressed edge. The bending moment resistance is expressed as the sum of the moments of blocks of compression, about the same layer. The equilibrium gives: Page 6-6

97 Guide to EC2 Section 6 y c f b y s - + cd w b - bw c s - = M * 2 2 By developing, it results: 2 2M * c y -2sy+ b-bw cs- =0 b f 2 w cd Figure 6.5. T-section treated with the rectangular stress diagram Taking: 2 c k= b-bw cs- b 2 w with k function of the geometrical data only, y is given by: 2 2M * y=s- s - +k b f w cd If M* is lower than the limit moment, no compressed reinforcement bars are needed. The tensioned reinforcement area is given by: 2A s = (F c +N Ed )/f yd and the resultant of compression F c is: F c = f cd [b w y + (b b w) c] If it is not necessary to put the tensioned reinforcement bars on two layers, in the above-shown formulae is is sufficient to identify s as d, while the first member of (7.13) gives the necessary area of reinforcement Approximate design method The method applies to those T-beams where the flange is able to withstand all compressive forces deriving from bending moment and axial force, without addition of compressed reinforcement bars. It's assumed that tensile stresses are uniformly distributed. With reference to Fig. 6.6, the total bending moment M* about the centroid of tensioned reinforcement bars is calculated: M* = M Ed - y* N Ed (N Ed positive if traction). Fig.6.6. T-section. Approximate design method The reinforcement is given by the formula * 1 M 2A s = + NEd f c yd s- 2 and it must be verified that the average compressive stress in the flange is not greater than f cd: * M c = fcd c bcs- 2 Page 6-7

98 Guide to EC2 Section Bending with axial force in rectangular section with symmetric reinforcement bars The ultimate limit state behaviour of a rectangular section with reinforcement bars A s = A' s placed symmetrically at the section edges and subjected to simple bending moment with an eccentric axial force N Ed is studied. The analysis is carried out through the determination of the moment resistance M Rd about the centroidal axis for given values of N Ed and geometric and mechanical properties of the section. The study starts from Fig. 6.1 which is reproduced as far as it's needed in Fig Four deformed configurations ( ) are taken into account. The first three, obtained by rotation around point B of the straight line that represents the plane section, are characterized by particular depths of the neutral axis x; line 4, that configures uniform strain c2, is vertical in the representation and passes by point C. Fig.6.7. Possible strain distributions at the ultimate limit state Relations that are recalled in the treatment:. Strain of upper reinforcement A' s (see point ): ' s cu2 d' 1 x Strain of lower reinforcement A s (see point ): s cu2 d 1 x Definition of line 1 Passing by B, the straight line assumes configuration 1 characterized, at the level of the upper f ' yk reinforcement layer, by strain s syd 0, (design limit of elasticity for B450 steel ses with t yk = 450 N/mm 2 and E s = 200 kn/mm 2 ). The depth of the neutral axis, calculated by (6.1) results: cu2 x1 d' k1d' cu2 syd The k 1 values for different concrete classes (as cu2 is function of f ck ), are given in Table 6.6 ( cu2 in absolute value). For x < x 1 the upper reinforcement layer is in elastic field; for x x 1 it works at stress f yd. The lower reinforcement layer, for x x 1, works at stress f yd. Table 6.6 values of k1 and k2 f ck (N/mm 2 ) cu2 k 1 k ,0035 2,27 0, ,0031 2,71 0, ,0029 3,08 0, ,0027 3,65 0, ,0026 4,06 0, ,0026 4,06 0,57 Line 2: it is defined by the strain s = syd of the lower layer of reinforcement. In this case the depth of the neutral axis, deduced by (6.2) results: Page 6-8

99 Guide to EC2 Section 6 cu2 x2 dk2d cu2 syd k 2 values are shown in Table 6.6. For positions of the neutral axis x 1 x x 2, both reinforcement layers are subjected to a stress s = f yd (compression for the upper one, traction for the lower one), with strain s syd. Configuration 3 is characterized by strain value s = 0 (and therefore s = 0) for the lower reinforcement (x = d). Therefore in the 3-4 range stress is s = f yd for the upper reinforcement and s = s Es for the lower. Line 3' is defined by c = 0 at the lower edge of section. In configuration 4: s = s' = c2 (in absolute value), which is always greater than syd. It results then s = s' = f yd. In the transition from 3 to 4 the upper reinforcement is compressed at stress f yd, the lower reinforcement at stress increasing from 0 to f yd. The following values of the axial force resistance N Rd correspond to configurations 1,2,3,4: N Rd1 = 1bx 1f cd N Rd2 = 1bx 2f cd In these two cases there are no contributions from the reinforcement bars because these are subjected to ±f yd, and generate two equal and opposite forces in equilibrium. N Rd3 = 1bdf cd + A' sf yd N Rd4 = bhf cd +2A sf yd. 1 values are given in Table 6.1 from the parabola-exponential rectangle model and in Table 6.2 for the rectangle model. Calculation of the moment resistance in the four above-defined sectors. a) N Ed < N Rd1, that is x < x 1 The position x of the neutral axis must be preliminary determined by the equation of equilibrium to shifting. Keeping in mind that the upper reinforcement A' s is compressed in elastic field and that the lower reinforcement A s is tensioned at stress f yd, the equilibrium is written as: -' sa s - 1x b f cd + A sf yd = - N Ed Taken ' s =E' s where ' s is given by (6.1), it results: N + A f - E A E A d' 2 Ed s yd cu2 s s cu2 s s x - x- =0 1b fcd 1b fcd The equation, written in synthesis 2 x - ** x- *** =0 has the solution x=+ (**)+ (**) +(***) 2 4 ' d' The ' s stress is now known and adds up to s =Escu21- x and the moment resistance about the centroidal level is: h h h M Rd = Asf yd( -d')+ As s'( -d')+1x b f cd( -2x) b) N Rd1 N Ed N Rd2 As both reinforcements are yielded, N Ed is exclusively supported by concrete. The equilibrium equation is: N Ed = N Rd = 1b x f cd, so that the depth of the neutral axis is: N Ed x= 1 b f cd Page 6-9

100 Guide to EC2 Section 6 With the above-determined x value, the moment resistance is: M = A f (d-d')+ x b f 0,5h- x (6.4) Rd s yd 1 cd 2 c) N Rd2 N Ed N Rd3 The equation of equilibrium to shifting is: ' -fyda s - 1x b f cd + A s s = -N Ed (6.5) As the reinforcement A s is in elastic field, s = E s s e s is given by (6.2) Replacing and developing it results: ' NEd -A sf 2 yd -cu2esas cu2esasd x - x- =0 1b f (6.5bis) cd 1b fcd Once determined x e s, the moment resistance results: MRd A' s f yd( h d') A s h s( d') h 1xbf cd( 2x) ( 6.6) d) In the fourth field (N Rd3 N Ed N Rd4 ) the moment resistance can be determined, with a good approximation, by the relation of proportionality indicated in fig. 6.8, which shows the final end of the interaction diagram M-N. Figure 6.8. Terminal end of the interaction diagram M-N The moment resistance reaches a maximum for x = x 2 where the analytic function that expresses it has an edge point due to the discontinuity between (6.4) and (6.6). The derivative for x = x 2 is positive if (6.4) is used and is negative with (6.6) Interaction diagram M Rd-N Rd In the case of sections subjected to bending with axial force with small eccentricity, such as those of columns, the most logical solution is the one with double symmetric reinforcement. Such sections can also withstand simple bending and, if it's the case, composed bending in relation if the dimensions and placement of reinforcement. In order to have an overview on the problem, let's consider the load capacity of a rectangular section (Fig. 6.9) with dimension h = 600 mm, b = 400 mm of f ck 30 concrete, in the four conditions: no reinforcement symmetric reinforcement (f yk = 450 N/mm 2 ) at the edges in percentage 0,5 1,0 1,5 on each edge, distanced at d' =50 mm. The calculation of the resistance of this section at the ultimate limit state is developed, for each of the four reinforcement conditions, by associating the parabola-rectangle diagrams for concrete and the bilinear diagram or steel, with 7 configurations characterized by strain values of plane section (reference to Fig. 1) given in Table 6.7. Steel B450 (f yk = 450 N/mm 2 ). c = - 0,0035 at upper end c= - 0,0035 at upper end c= - 0,0035 at upper end c= - 0,0035 at upper end c= - 0,0035 at upper end c= - 0,0035 at upper end c= - 0,0020 everywhere Table 6.7. Deformed section configurations s = + 0,05000 (bottom reinf.) s = + 0,02500 (bottom reinf.) s= + 0,01000 (bottom reinf.) s= + 0,00196 (bottom reinf.) s= 0,00000 (bottom reinf.) c= 0,00000 at lower end c = - 0,0020 everywhere Development of the calculation in relation with the third strain condition for the reinforced section with 1% bilateral reinforcement (A s = A' s = 2400 mm 2 ) Upper reinforcement: ' s = - 0,0023 and therefore ' s = -391 N/mm 2 ; F' s = -939 kn Lower reinforcement: s = + 0,010 and therefore s = N/mm 2, F s = +939 kn Neutral axis: x/d = 3,5/(3,5+10), and as d = 550 mm, x = 142,6 mm Page 6-10

101 Guide to EC2 Section 6 F c = 1bxf cd = 0, ,617,0 = -785 kn Distance of F c from the compressed edge: 2x = 59 mm N Rd = F c + F s + F' s = = -785 kn Moment about the concrete section centroid M Rd = F c (d/2-2x ) + F s (d d )= 189, ,5 = 658,6 knm The eccentricity of N Rd is M Rd / N Rd = 839 mm. Fig. 6.9 graphically shows the 29 pairs of results obtained. For each value of the percentage of reinforcement the points are joined by a straight line. The result is convex polygons. The following observations arise from the observation of Fig. 6.9: 3. the polygons include the domains of resistance: the points of co-ordinates M Ed, N Ed placed inside the polygon are in a safe zone; the points on the polygon strictly verify the ultimate limit state; external point do not meet resistance conditions at ultimate limit state 4. a straight line parallel to the N axis intersects the polygon in two points. This means that with a given reinforcement, a given bending moment can be withstood by two different values of the axial force. The limit case of a single N value happens when the straight line passes by the highest point of the polygon. 5. Only one value of M can be associated to a given value of N, as it's possible to verify by tracing a line parallel to the M axis. 6. The polygon related to the non-reinforced section denotes the possibility to withstand bending moments only if they come with an adequate axial force (provided by self weight or by prestressing). 7. The branches on the left of the M axis denote resistance to bending with positive axial force 8. The straight line of inclination M/N = h/30 = 20 mm defines the field of use of the polygons: in fact, according to [6.1(4)-EC2] a minimal eccentricity must always be taken into account, adding up to the bigger value between h/30 and 20 mm. Such polygons as those traced below are called M-N interaction diagrams. Figure 6.9. Interaction diagram for rectangular section Biaxial bending and bending with axial force Biaxial bending may be separated into separate uniaxial bending components under circumstances laid down in Eurocode For pure biaxial bending, where the bending components lay on the two centroid axis of inertia, the problem solution has computational difficulties. If a design software is not used, and calculation developed by hand, it should be processed by iterations; in such case it's convenient to adopt the rectangular stress diagram for concrete. Given a section subjected to an axial force N Ed applied on the centre of gravity, and to two bending components M Eyd e M Ezd expressed by two vectors orientated along a couple of orthogonal axis y e z with origin in the centre of gravity. In general, the existence of a stress distribution that gives place to resistance greater or equal to the action effects must be demonstrated, as well as the fact that the straight line that connects the centre of gravity of the compressed zone with the centre of gravity of the tensioned reinforcement is perpendicular to the resultant bending vector M Ed. This implies that the eccentric axial force must also lay on that line. Page 6-11

102 Guide to EC2 Section Shear Members not requiring design shear reinforcement C6.2.2 Shear capacity of members without shear reinforcement Shear flexure capacity Most shear failures occur in the region of the member cracked in flexure. It is necessary to make a distinction between shear flexure and shear tension. In this chapter only shear flexure is regarded, which can be considered as the general case. In ENV the equation for the shear capacity of members without shear reinforcement was V Rd1 = [ Rd k ( l) cp]b wd (6.7) Where Rd basic shear strength, which follows from Rd = 0.25f ctk,0.05/ c. k factor allowing for the size effect, equal to k = 1.6 d (m) > 1 l flexural tensile reinforcement ratio, As/b wd < 0.02 cp design axial stress (if any) = N Sd/A c b w minimum web section The are two shortcomings with regard to the use of this equation. At first the role of the concrete strength is not correct, as was demonstrated in [Walraven, 1987, pp ] For lower strength concrete classes the deviations were not yet very large, but if the strength increases the deviations soon reach an unacceptable level. The second problem is that the equation has principally been derived for beams, failing in shear flexure and is not valid for members which typically fail in shear tension. Such members are for instance prestressed hollow core slabs, which nearly always fail in shear tension, in the area where the member is not cracked in flexure. Applied to such members Eq. 6.7 would give unnecessary conservative results. The recommendations for the determination of the shear flexure capacity of members not reinforced in shear are given in chapter of pren :2001. The basic formula is given as Eq. 6.2.a in this document. This equation has been derived in the following way. The basic equation adopted, which was believed to take appropriate account of the most important influencing factors like concrete strength, longitudinal reinforcement ratio and cross-sectional height was V =Ck 100 f b d (6.8) 1/3 u l c w where k = size factor = 1 + (200/d) 1/2 l = longitudinal reinforcement ratio f c = concrete cylinder strength (N/mm 2 ) C = coefficient to be determined A selection was made of a representative number of shear tests, considering a parameter variation as wide as possible and as well as possible distributed within practical limits. This was already done by König and Fischer (1995). An overview of the test parameters is given in Fig Then for every test result the optimum value C was determined. If the distribution is normal, Fig a lower bound value for C was determined according to the level 2 method described in [Taerwe, 1993 ] with the equation: C lower bound = C mean (1-) (6.9) where sensitivity factor, equal to 0.8 for the case of one dominating variable (concrete strength) reliability index, taken equal to 3.8 according to [Eurocode, Basis of Structural design, Draft version 2001 ] standard deviation If the distribution turns out to be log-normal, Fig. 6.11, the equation is C lower bound = C mean exp ( ) (6.10) In these equations a reliability index = 3.8 means a probability of occurrence of %. König and Fisher (1995) carried out this procedure for 176 shear tests. Page 6-12

103 Guide to EC2 Section 6 Figure Relative frequency of parameters in test data bank used by König and Fischer (1995) in order to find a reliable lower bound equation for the shear capacity of members without shear reinforcement Figure Normal and log-normal distribution As a result of their analysis they found that a coefficient C = 0.12 would be a good lower bound. In Fig it is shown that the prediction accuracy of this equation is substantially better than that of the old EC formula. Figure a. Shear capacity according to Eq. 6.8 (MC 90): relative frequency for NSC and HSC (König, Fischer, 1993) b. Shear capacity according to Eq. 6.7 (ENV ): relative frequency for NSC and HSC, according to König, Fischer (1993) As an addition Fig shows an evaluation carried out by Regan [Regan, 1993], which confirms the findings by König/Fischer. Page 6-13

104 Guide to EC2 Section 6 Figure Shear strength of non-prestressed members without shear reinforcement, comparison of test results with Eq. 6.8 [Regan, 1999.] It was however argued, that the equation V Rd,c = 0,12 k (100 l f ck) 1/3 b w d (6.11) has two disadvantages the first is that it does not distinguish between persistent & transient loading combinations and accidental loading combinations, for which different safety levels apply (pren :2001 chapter gives c = 1,5 for persistent and transient and c = 1,2 for accidental situations). Therefore the equation was modified by introducing the concrete safety factor explicitly. V Rd,c = (0,18/ c) k (100 l f ck) 1/3 b w d (6.12) The second is that the shear capacity goes to 0 when l = 0. Furthermore it was wished to have a simple conservative value for V Rd,c for a first check of the bearing capacity. In many countries simple formulations have been used on the basis of V Rd,c = C f ctd b w d (6.13) where f ctd is the design tensile strength of the concrete and C is a coefficient. Practice in the various countries however is quite different because C varies in the range from 0,3 to 0,75. Considering the value of C it should be noted that this equation is a simplification of the rigorous one. To have general validity, even for rare but still possible cases, C should be based on the most unfavourable combination of parameters. That means that the governing case is a slab with a large cross-sectional depth d and a low longitudinal reinforcement ratio. In his paper Basic facts concerning shear failure, Kani (1966) showed that shear failures are unlikely to occur for longitudinal reinforcement ratio s smaller than 0,6%. However, his shear valley was based on beams with a cross-sectional effective depth of only d = 270 mm. For larger depths the critical value of 0 decreases. Therefore a number of shear failures reported in literature have been selected with large d and small 0 values, see Table 6.8. Page 6-14

105 Guide to EC2 Section 6 Table 6.8. Determination of C on the basis of selected tests The most unfavourable values for C are 0,34, found for Aster&Koch s tests Nr.11 and 16, with d = 500 and 750 mm and 0 = 0,46 and 0,42% respectively. So, with some rounding off a value C = 0,35 would be appropriate for the simplified design equation. In pren :2001 a value 0,40 is used. An argument might be that the utmost part of the practical cases consists of slabs with smaller depths, subjected to uniform loading, where the maximum shear force does not coincide with the maximum moment, and the reinforcement ratio s are small enough to ensure failure by bending. The seldom case of a slab spanning in one direction, with a high cross-section, a critically low reinforcement ratio and a line load just at the most critical position from the support would then have a slightly lower safety. On the other hand formula s should always be safe enough to take account of any possible (not likely) case, which would be an argument in favour of the use of 0,35. Some questions may be raised with regard to the definition of b w being the smallest width of the cross-section in the tensile area. Tests on tapered cross-sections showed that there is certainly an influence of the definition of the web width, as shown in Fig. 6.14, left (tests by Leung, Chew and Regan, 1976). Fig. 6.14, right, shows that a definition of b w as the average width of the beam would be appropriate for this case. Figure Shear resistance of beams with tapered cross-section (Leung, Chew and Regan, 1976) In a more recent publication (Regan, 2000) the author opts for a definition of b w = 2/3 b min + 1/3 b max, but admits at the same time that the available evidence is rather scarce. A possible compromise could be to define b w as the average width of the part of the cross-section in tension, with a maximum of 1,25 of the minimum width. The equations in pren :2001 contain as well a term 0,15 cp regarding the influence of an axial force on the shear capacity, for instance by prestressing. Basically the influence of prestressing can be taken into account as proposed by Hedman & Losberg (1978). It was argued that, with regard to the behaviour in shear, a prestressed beam can be regarded as a reinforced beam after the decompression moment has been reached. On the basis of this argument the shear resistance was formulated as V Rd,c = V c + V p where V c is the shear resistance of a similar non-prestressed beam and V p is the contribution of the prestressing force to the shear capacity, which can be formulated as Vp = M 0/a, where M 0 is the decompression moment and a is the distance from the load to the support, Fig Figure Calculation of contribution Vp from prestressing to the shear resistance according to Hedman and Losberg (1978) However, this method works well for the evaluation of laboratory tests but is less suitable for real Page 6-15

106 Guide to EC2 Section 6 members mostly subjected to uniformly distributed loading. A solution is to replace M 0/a by M 0/(M x/v x), where M x and V x are the bending moment and the shear force in the section considered. However, this would complicate the shear design because then V p would be different in any crosssection. Another disadvantage is that V p would go to infinity in a moment inflexion point, where M x = 0. It can simply be derived that for a rectangular cross-section with a width b, a height h and an eccentricity of the prestressing force e p, the contribution V p to the shear resistance is V p = F p (1/6 + e p/h) (a/h) (6.14) Assuming d = 0,85h this would result in; V p = 1,18 F p (1/6 + e p/h) (a/d) (6.15) In most tests on shear critical beams the ratio e p/h is about 0,35. With a/d varying between 2,5 and 4,0, like in most shear tests, this would mean that V p would vary between 0,15 cpb d and 0,25 cpb d. Evaluating test results it is therefore not amazing that the coefficient 0,15 turns out to be a safe lower bound in shear critical regions. Nielsen (1990) compared the shear equation in ENV which gives about the same results as Eq. 6.2a in pren :2001 for moderate concrete strengths, with 287 test results and found that it was at the safe side. The effect of longitudinal compression should, of course, not be mixed up with the effect of the cable curvature, which exerts a favourable transverse load on the member. This effect, known as the load balancing effect, is introduced as a load (load balancing principle). For axial tension in pren the same formula is used, with a different sign for 0,15 cp, so that an axial tensile force gives rise to a slight reduction of the shear capacity. It should be noted that in continuous beams there is tension in both top and bottom and excessive curtailment at sections of contra flexure may lead to diagonal cracking and shear failure in such a region. This was the main cause of failure in an actual structure [Hognestadt and Elstner, 1957]. If a structural member is well designed for axial tension the shear capacity of the members is hardly reduced. This was for instance shown by Regan [Regan, 1971 and 1999] who carried out a systematic investigation into the effect of an axial tensile force on the shear capacity of both members unreinforced and reinforced for shear. Tests have been carried out according to the principle shown in Fig Beams with a rectangular cross-section were provided with nibs, enabling the transmission of an axial tensile force in the middle part. The axial tensile force varied between 0 and 130 kn. The force could be applied in two ways: before subjecting the member to transverse loading, or in proportion to the transverse loading. In both cases the shear capacity was hardly influenced, although the member sometimes showed wide open cracks across the total cross section in the moment inflexion region. Figure Results of tests on beams subjected to axial tension, bending and shear, and failing in shear [Regan, 1999] For similar arguments, reference is made to [Bhide and Collins, 1989] Page 6-16

107 Guide to EC2 Section Shear tension capacity In special cases, like for instance when pretensioned strands are used in members with reduced web widths, such as in prestressed hollow core slabs, shear tension failures can occur, Fig Figure Shear tension failure Figure Calculation of shear tension capacity with Mohr s circle In this case failure occurs due to the fact that the principal tensile stress in the web reaches the tensile strength of the concrete in the region uncracked in flexure. The principal tensile strength in the web calculated using Mohr s circle, Fig. 6.18, is equal to =- I N+ + N (6.16) 2 4 substituting = V Rd,ct S/b wi and N = I cp the code s expression EC-2, Eq. 6.3 Ib w V 2 Rd,ct = fctd - Icpfctd (6.17) S is obtained Loads near to supports In (5) the equation (5) or in prenv :2001 the Equation 6.2.a, is extended with a factor (2d/x) in order to cope with the increased shear capacity in the case of loads applied near to supports. According to this formulation, at a distance 0.5d < x < 2d the shear capacity may be increased to V Rd,ct = 0,12 k (100 l f ck) 1/3 (2d/x) b w d. (6.18) This may need some explanation, since it might be argued that loads near to supports may be treated with the rules given in EC-2, 2001 version, chapter 6.5 Design of discontinuity regions with strut and tie models. However, there are many arguments in favour of the formulation according to Eq. 6.18: - According to the formulations for the strut and tie model the capacity of the concrete struts only depends on the strength of the concrete, see e.g. fig Consequently, the maximum capacity is a function of the concrete strength and the width of the support area. Figure Bearing capacity of short member according to strut and tie model with defined maximum concrete stress in the struts It can easily be seen that this is a very simplified representation of reality, since the capacity of such a member results to be independent of the slenderness ratio a/d, which is known to have a strong influence. Furthermore short members are prone to significant size effects. It was shown [Lehwalter and Walraven, 1994), that the size effect in short members is the same for short and slender members, so that here also the factor k = 1 + (200/d) applies. Lehwalter carried out tests on short members with various sizes, a/d ratio s and support widths, and compared the equivalent maximum stress in the concrete struts, Fig The dotted plane is valid for a maximum stress 0,6 f c. It is seen that for lower a/d ratio s the capacity is considerably higher than the one obtained with the strut and tie model. It is seen furthermore that the limit 0.55 f c as Page 6-17

108 Guide to EC2 Section 6 defined in (P) for struts with transverse tension is appropriate for a/d < 2.0, members with depths until 1 m and a support width up to about 0.25d. For a number of practical members, like in the case of corbels and pile caps, it is important to reduce the size as much as possible. A more accurate formulation than the strut and tie model is therefore useful in those cases. - Another case is shown in Fig It is a part of a foundation caisson in the Storebaelt bridge, with a slab of about 1 meter and wall distances of about 5 m. A substantial part of the counterpressure of the soil is transmitted directly to the walls, so that the governing shear load is small. Without a provision like the one given in Eq. 10, unnecessary shear reinforcement would be required. Figure Maximum stress in concrete struts as calculated on the basis of test results (Walraven, Lehwalter, 1989) Figure Foundation slab in Storebaelt caisson By introducing the distance x and determining the shear capacity in every cross section, also combinations of loads (like two concentrated loads, or a uniformly distributed load and a concentrated load) can be handled. An important question is whether the multiplication factor should be (3d/a, 2.5d/a or 2d/). Regan [1998], on the basis of the analysis of many experiments, concluded that: a. For simply supported beams subjected to concentrated loads a factor (2.5d/a) is appropriate. This is confirmed in Fig on the basis of tests by Baldwin and Viest (1958), Clark (1951), De Cossio and Siess (1960), Küng, Lehwalter (198 ), Matthey and Watstein (1963), Morrow and Viest (1957), Regan (1971) and Rogowski and MacGregor (1983) b. For continuous beams with concentrated loads even (3d/a) gives safe results. c. For simply supported beams subjected to distributed loading only (2d/a) gives safe results. The diagram in Fig is based on tests by Bernaert and Siess (1956), Leonhardt and Walther (1961), Rüsch, Haugli, Mayer (1962) and Krefeld and Thurston (1966). The figure shows graphs of V test/v calc plotted against l/d, with V calc computed assuming values of 2d/x and 2.5d/x. Most, but not 95% of the points lie above V test/v calc = 1 for 2d/x, but less than half do so with 2.5d/x. The results which are on the unsafe side with 2d/x need not to be of too much concern as Krefeld and Thurston s work includes many beams with low concrete strengths. Page 6-18

109 Guide to EC2 Section 6 Figure Results of tests on simply supported beams without shear reinforcement subjected to concentrated loads (Regan, 1998) Figure Results of tests on simply supported beams without shear reinforcement subjected to distributed loads (Regan, 1998) Prestressed members without shear reinforcement Four failure modes may be envisaged under combination of shear and bending within the extremity region for such elements: 1. Exceeding the tensile strength of concrete in regions uncracked in bending as described by expression (6.4). 2. Exceeding the shear resistance given by expression (6.2a) in presence of bending moments greater than the cracking bending moment. 3. Anchorage loss due to bending cracks within transmission length. 4. Snap back failure at cracking bending moment outside the transmission length, when the acting shear corresponding to the cracking bending moment exceeds the bearing capacity calculated with expression (6.2a). The designer should verify all the four failure mechanisms described above with particular care to the snap back behavior. Page 6-19

110 Guide to EC2 Section Members requiring design shear reinforcement C6.2.3 Members requiring shear reinforcement Non prestressed members In ENV the Standard Method and the Variable Inclination Method were offered as design alternatives. The Standard Method, in spite of its acceptable accuracy, is from a physical point of view unsatisfactory, because the concrete term is purely empirical and hides the physical reality. This reality is, that a redistribution of forces occurs in the webs of shear reinforced concrete beams, resulting in strut inclinations smaller than 45, Fig Figure Redistribution of forces in a shear-loaded web by strut rotation Because of a smaller strut inclination, a larger number of stirrups is activated, and the shear capacity is increased. A result of the smaller strut inclination is, however, that the stresses in the concrete struts are larger, so that an appropriate upper limit to the shear capacity has to be defined. This method, with strut inclinations smaller than 45 may be assumed for design, and is known as the variable strut inclination method. This approach is not only attractive because of its agreement with the physical reality, but also because it is a simple equilibrium method, giving a transparent view of the flow of forces in the structure. In ENV , in chapter , the designer is allowed to choose the strut inclination between 0,4 < cot < 2,5 which means that may be chosen between 21,8 and 68,2. The choice of the lowest value mostly leads to the most economic design. In this case the compression struts are supposed to rotate from an initial value of 45* to a lower value of about 22. If the strut inclination is and the (vertical) shear reinforcement yields, a shear force Asw V u,3 = zfyw cot (6.19) s Is transmitted, Fig. 6.25a. If the shear reinforcement yields, the truss can, by rotation of the compression struts to a lower inclination, activate more stirrups for the transmission of the shear force and, as such, extend the zone of failure. Due to strut rotation, the stress in the concrete struts increases. Consequently, rotation can only continue until crushing of the concrete occurs. For an ultimate compression stress f c1 in the concrete struts, the corresponding shear force is (Figure 6.25b). bwzfc1 V u,2 = (6.20) cot + tan where f c1 = f c In those equations b w web width z inner lever arm 0,9d s stirrup distance f yw yield stress of stirrups inclination of concrete struts A sw cross-sectional area of one stirrup effectiveness factor, taking account of the fact that the beam web, which is transversally in tension, is not as well suited to resist the inclined compression as cylinders used to determine f c. Fig a. Ultimate capacity Vu,3 for yielding stirrups b. Ultimate capacity Vu,2 for crushing of concrete struts Page 6-20

111 Guide to EC2 Section 6 For generally the expression = 0,6 (1 f ck/250) (6.21) is used (CEB-FIP Model Code 1990). By equalling 6.19 and 6.20 the maximum possible shear force and the corresponding inclination are found. Fig. 19 shows the development of V u,2 and V u,3 for decreasing. Figure Dependence of Vu,2 and Vu,3 on the strut inclination The expression for the ultimate nominal shear strength vu and the corresponding value of are then u fc1 1- (6.22) And tan = 1- (6.23) Where Vu = u w (6.24) swfyw = f c1 (6.25) with f c1 = f c and w is the shear reinforcement ratio according to w = A sw/b ws. Eq represents a circle in a V u/f c1 - coordinate system, Fig It is found that when runs from 0 to 0.5, runs from 0 to 45. For > 0.5, the value of is constant and equal to 45. However, it was assumed that cot = 2,5 is a limit. In graphical terms this is shown as the linear cut-off in Fig Figure Graphical representation of Eq. 16, with cut-off for cot = 2,5 Measurements of the deformation of the web in shear loaded I-beams show typically a behaviour as shown in Fig The diagram shows lines numbered from 1 to 4. Line 1 In the beginning of shear loading the beams is uncracked in shear so that the principal strain direction is 45. Line 2 At the formation of inclined shear cracks the principal strain direction decreases Line 3 After having reached the stabilized inclined crack pattern a new type of equilibrium is obtained. The behaviour is elastic: the (constant) principal strain direction depends on the stiffness ratio' in the cracked state. Line 4 When the stirrups start yielding the web searches for a new state of equilibrium. By rotating down to a lower inclination the beam activates more stirrups to carry the load. In the mean time the compressive stress in the concrete increases. When the crushing strength of the struts is reached the beam fails in shear. Page 6-21

112 Guide to EC2 Section 6 Figure Rotation of the concrete struts as measured on the web of beams with shear reinforcement, schematically represented (Walraven, 1995 and 1999) Fig. 6.29a shows the strut rotation as measured in three beams with different shear reinforcement ratio s (L = low, M = medium and H = High). It can be seen that for M and H the beams fail before the stirrups have yielded. Fig. 6.29b shows a similar diagram for a series of high strength concrete beams (f c 90 N/mm 2 ). Figure a Strut rotation as measured in beams with normal strength concrete (Walraven, 1995) b.strut rotation as measured in beams made of high strength concrete (Walraven, 1999) Fig shows a verification of the combination of Eq and Eq with the limit cot = 2.5 with test results from Sörensen (1974), Regan and Rezai-Jorabi (1987), Placas and Regan (1971), Leonhardt and Walther (1961), Kahn and Regan (1971), Moayer and Regan (1971), Hamadi and Regan (1980), Muhidin and Regan (1977), Levi and Marro (1993) and Walraven (1999). Figure Non prestressed beams with vertical stirrups relationship between shear strength and stirrup reinforcement Page 6-22

113 Guide to EC2 Section Prestressed members with shear reinforcement If the same rules are applied to prestressed members with shear reinforcement, like in ENV and MC 90, it can be seen that there is apparently an increase of both safety and scatter, Fig The test used for this figure are from Hanson and Hulsbos (1964), Bennett and Debaiky (1974), Moayer and Regan (1974), Levi and Marro (1993), Lyngberg (1976), Aparicio and Calavera (2000), Görtz and Hegger (1999), Leonhardt, Koch and Rostasy (1974). Many of the test results are collected in a databank, described in (Walraven, 1987). Figure Experimental results of shear tests on prestressed beams with shear reinforcement, in comparison with the calculated results according to the variable strut inclination method (no special web crushing criterion for prestressed concrete) In ENV the effect of prestressing on the upper limit of the shear capacity V Rd,i is partially neutral and partially negative. In (4). The following statement is found: In the absence of more rigorous analysis, at no section in any element should the design shear force exceed V Rd,2. Where the member is subjected to an applied axial compression, V Rd2 should be in accordance with the following equation: V Rd,red = 1.67 V Rd,2 (1 - cp.eff/f cd) < V Rd,2 (6.26) Fig shows the dependence of the upper limit for the shear capacity on the level of prestressing. Fiugure Reduction of maximum shear capacity by axial compressive stress according to ENV , Clause (4) Page 6-23

114 Guide to EC2 Section 6 In his Commentaries on Shear and Torsion, Nielsen (1990) states that prestressing has a positive influence on the shear capacity of beams with shear reinforcement. He proposed to multiply (which was then equal to = 0.7 f ck/200 > 0.5) with a factor c = cp,eff / f c with cp,eff / f c < 0,5 (6.27) A comparison with 93 tests results shows, however, that the expression is not sufficiently conservative, to serve as a safe lower bound over the whole region of test results, Fig It should furthermore be noted that all test results, used in the comparison, have ratio s of cp/f c lower than 0,4 and that the multiplication factor is obviously applicable only for this region. Another proposal for taking the influence of prestressing into account in the -value was given by Fouré (2000): - for small compression, with 0 < cp < 0,4f cd c = (1 0,67 cp/f ctm) (6.28) - for large compression, with 0,4f cd < cp < f cd Figure Comparison of results of shear tests with variable inclination truss analogy with effectivity factor = (0,7 fc/200)(1 + cp/fc), according to Nielsen (1990) c = {1,2 (1 - cp/f cd) (1 + cp/f cd)} 0,5 (6.29) However, for the region of low compressive stresses this expression gives about the same results as Eq A more moderate expression, taking into account the influence of prestressing, is c = (1 + cp/f c) for 0 < cp/f c < 0.25 f c c = 1.25 for 0.25f c < cp < 0.5f c c = 2.5 (1 - cp/f c) for 0.5f c < cp < 1.0f c In Fig the same data as used in Fig are evaluated using Eq It appears that the safety margin and the scatter are reduced (the details of the calculation are found in Appendix 1). The new proposal is compared with the other ones in Fig Figure Comparison of new proposal (Eq. 6.29) with original formulation in ENV (without influence of prestressing) and proposals by Nielsen (1990) and Fouré (2000) for fck Page 6-24

115 Guide to EC2 Section 6 Figure Experimental results of shear tests on prestressed beams with shear reinforcement, in comparison with the calculated results according to the variable strut inclination method, with extension according to Eq Members reinforced in shear with loads near to supports Similar to members without shear reinforcement, in members with shear reinforcement the load bearing capacity is increased for loads near to supports. In the Standard Method, as formulated in ENV this was taken into account by multiplying the concrete term, with a factor (2d/x). However, the Variable Inclination Method not containing a concrete term, it was introduced here for x/d < 2. The formulation for this case is then V Rd = V Rd,ct + A sw f ywd sin (6.30) The transmission of forces occurs according to Figure6.36. Figure Combination of truss and strut and tie Measurements on shear reinforcement showed that the stirrups just adjacent to the load- and support area do not reach the yield stress, (Asin, 2000). Therefore the shear reinforcement is considered to be effective only within the central 0,75 area between load and support. 6.3 Torsion See example 6.6 and 6.7 Page 6-25

116 Guide to EC2 Section Punching C6.4. Basic equation for symmetrical punching at interior columns Punching shear capacity of non-prestressed slabs without punching reinforcement In ENV a nominal shear stress was defined as the load divided by the product the slab's effective depth and the length of the control perimeter, which was defined to located at (1.5d) from the edge of the column. The design punching shear capacity was V Rd1 = v Rd1 u (6.31a) Where u is the length of the critical perimeter, taken at a distance 1.5d from the loaded area, the design shear resistance per unit length v Rd1 followed from v Rd1 = Rd k ( l)d (6.31b) where Rd basic shear strength = 0.25 f ctk / c k size factor = 1.6- d [m] > 1.0 d effective depth of slab = (d x + d y)/2 flexural reinforcement ratio = ( x + y)/2 l It was already shown in 1980 [1], that in the derivation of this equation an error was committed, which leads to unconservative results for higher concrete strengths. Therefore it was decided adopt the formulation for the punching shear capacity given in Model Code when the design punching shear capacity is given by V Rdc = v Rdc.u d (6.32a) where u = length of the critical perimeter, taken at a 2d distance from the loaded area d = mean effective slab depth = (d x + d y)/2 and where the design punching shear stress for non-prestressed slabs value is v Rdc = 0.12 k (100 lf ck ) 1/3 (6.32b) with k = size factor = 1+ (200/d) 2.0 d in mm l = ( lx. ly) 0.02 f ck = characteristic cylinder strength of concrete In the new definition, according to MC 90, the control perimeter is moved from a distance 1.5d from the column, to a distance of 2d, see Fig There are two reasons to adopt the distance 2d. First it makes the limiting shear stress much more uniform for different column sizes. Second now for punching the same formulation can be used as for normal shear in members without shear reinforcement, where also Eq. 6.32b is applied. Figure6.37. Basic control perimeters around loaded areas Often questions are raised with regard to the coefficient 0.12 in Eq. 6.32b. Therefore at first an evaluation is carried out in order to verify this value. Altogether 112 test results have been considered, taken from [2-12]. 78 of those results refer to tests on specimens with cylinder strength ranging from 15 to 60 MPa, whereas 32 refer to tests on high strength concrete specimens with concrete cylinder strengths ranging from 60 to 120 MPa. This enables a good evaluation of the validity of the punching shear formula (Eq. 6.32a and 6.32b) for higher concrete strengths. The tests cover the interval of individual parameters given in Table 6.9. Table 6.9. Range of parameters in tests used for evaluation Page 6-26

117 Guide to EC2 Section 6 Fig shows a diagram in which the values v exp /v calc are shown as a function of the concrete strength. The tests of Base fall somewhat outside of the scope probably due to the very small maximum particle diameter (D max = 4,2 mm). Those tests therefore have to be regarded with some reservation. Figure6.38. Punching strength of slabs without shear reinforcement: comparison of test results v/s eq.6.32 Fig shows the frequencies of the relative punching shear capacities (ratio experimental to calculated values) for the data considered. Figure Frequencies of relative punching shear carrying capacity Assuming a normal distribution, a mean value of is obtained with a standard deviation of = , and a coefficient of variation v = Strictly speaking this would mean a characteristic lower bound value of = assuming a safety factor of 1.5 this would result in a coefficient of 0.10 in stead of 0.12 in the equation of the design punching shear stress (Eq. 6.32b). However, although the variation of the concrete strength (for which a material safety factor 1.5 applies) is the dominating factor with regard to the scatter of results in punching shear tests, the punching shear capacity is not linearly proportional to the concrete compressive strength (the fck value has an exponent 1/3 in Eq. 6.32b ), so that simply applying a material safety factor 1.5 as well for the derivation of the punching shear capacity would be inappropriate. Therefore a more sophisticated approach was necessary in order to unambiguously derive a design equation with the required level of reliability. For such a case the classical "level 2 method", as described in EC-l Basis of Design is suitable. The way how to deal with this method has been described and illustrated by Taerwe [13]. The same method was applied by Konig and Fischer for investigating the reliability of existing formulations for the shear capacity of members without shear reinforcement [14]. According to the level 2 method, a reliable design equation can be derived from test results with the general formulation B Rd = BR (1 - BR BR) (6.33) where B Rd design value BR mean value of test results BR sensitivity factor for B R, normally taken as 0.8 in the case of one dominating parameter target safety index, taken 3.8 BR coefficient of variation with BR = 0.191, BR = 0.8 and BR = a value for the design coefficient in Eq. 6.32b of Page 6-27

118 Guide to EC2 Section 6 was obtained. In this derivation, however, the mean concrete cylinder compressive strength has been used, whereas in the code expression the 5%-lower value f ck is used. In the Model Code the relation f ck = f cm - 8 (MPa) (6.34) is given. This means a coefficient of variation for a concrete C25 of v = 0.15 and for a concrete C90 of v = In combination with B R = 0.13 for the punching tests this would mean an increase of the coefficient of about 6.8 % for C25 and 3.6 % for C90 (see [14, p. 91). This would then result in a coefficient for a concrete class C25 to for a concrete class C90. It can therefore be concluded that equation 6.32a,b is correct. A disadvantage of Eq a,b is that they go to 0 if goes to 0. This could give unrealistically low punching shear capacities for low reinforcement ratio's, that may for instance occur in prestressed slabs. Furthermore designers like to have a simple lower bound formulation for a fist check. Therefore a lower bound was added, solely depending on the concrete tensile strength, according to the relation v u > C f ctd, where f ctd = f ctk / c. Evaluating the same results as shown in Fig with the equation v u = C f ctk, it was found that for normal strength concrete (<C50/60) a 5% lower value C =0,57 applied and for high strength concrete (>C50/60) a value equal to C= 0,42. It should however be noted that the collection of tests does not contain slabs with cross-sectional depths larger than 275 mm. In order to cope with larger slab depths used in practice the coefficient C 5% should therefore be further reduced. The value 0,35, used as a lower limit for shear as well, seems to be quite reasonable. Taking into account this lower li the design equation for non-prestressed slabs should therefore be: V Rd,c = (0,18/ c) k (100 l f ck) 1/3 > 0,35f ctd (6.35) Punching shear resistance of prestressed slabs without shear reinforcement. For shear loaded members the influence of a normal compression force is taken into account a separate contribution of 0,15 cp to the ultimate shear stress v Rd.c (prenv : a), see also the report for shear. It is logic that also with regard to punching the effect of prestressing will be positive. It is however not expected that the same term as for shear can be used, because the contribution of prestressing to the punching resistance depends also decisively on the definition of the control perimeter. In order to find the contribution prestressing a selection of test results has been made: Andersson [40], Gerber & Bums [41], Stahlton [42], Pralong, Brändli, Thürlimann [43] and Kordina, Nölting [44]. A comparison of the test results with the design equation: v Rd,c = (0,18/ c) k (100 l f ck) 1/3-0,08 cp > 0,35 f ctk / c - 0,08 cp (6.36) The mean value of v exp/ v Rd,c is 1,58 and the standard variation is s = 0,20. According to Eq. 6.33, with = 0,8 and = 3,8 the design value should be (1,58-0,8. 3,8. 0,20) v Rd,c = 0,972 v Rd,c. Actually this means that Eq. 6.36, giving values which are only slightly (2,8%) too high, is acceptable as a design equation. Fig Verification of Eq. 6 with test results Punching shear resistance of labs with punching shear reinforcement In ENV , Eq. 6.34, it was assumed that the contribution of punching shear reinforcement to the total shear capacity can be accounted for by A sw f yd sin (6.37) Adding this contribution to the punching shear capacity of a similar slab without shear capacity, Page 6-28

119 Guide to EC2 Section 6 according to Eq, 6.31, would gives the total punching shear resistance. A first important question is if the summation principle of a concrete component and a punching reinforcement component is valid anyhow. In the descriptive model of Kinnunen and Nylander [15] for slabs without punching reinforcement the tangential compressive strain at the bottom face of the slab is the design criterion. A punching shear reinforcement would then only be able to limit the rotation of the kinematic punching shear mechanism and as such reduce the compressive strain in the critical area, so that the failure load is increased. A further argument against the taking into account in full of the reinforcement according to Eq is that it is hard to find adequately anchored punching shear reinforcement at both sides of a critical crack Therefore the punching shear reinforcement is not yet yielding when the concrete contribution is at its maximum. One can also say that due to the vertical movement of the punching cone, concrete component has already a reduced value at the moment that yielding of the shear reinforcement has been reached. In literature two types of proposals are distinguished in order to cope with this phenomenon. One group of researchers, such as Moe [15], Pranz [6], Herzog [16] Petcu [17], Kordina,/Nölting [18] propose efficiency factors for the contribution of the shear reinforcement ranging from 0.80 down to even Others, like Elstner/Hognestadt [19],and Regan [20], propose to use the summation principle, however with a reduced concrete contribution (efficiency factors ranging from 0.6 to 0.8). Fig shows a comparison of test results (punching failures) from Gomcs [22, 23], Yitzakhi [25] and Regan [24] with the formulation V u = 0.75V c + V s (6.38) where V c is the concrete contribution (punching shear capacity of similar slab without shear reinforcement) and V s is the contribution of the yielding steel. In the prenv :2001, the formulation according to MC 90 has been chosen, but with effective design strength of the shear reinforcement which depends on the slab depth, in order to account for the anchorage efficiency. This means that V Rd,cs = 0,75 v Rd,c u d + A sw f ywd,eff sin (6.39) where v Rd,c according to Eq. 6.32b inclination of the shear reinforcement f ywd,eff design strength of shear reinforcement, according to f ywd,eff = ,25d < f ywd (Mpa). shear reinforcement within the perimeter considered. A sw Figure Punching capacities related to resistance of the shear reinforcement (Regan [24]) The increase of the punching shear capacity by shear reinforcement is limited to a bound. In the version of EC-2 of 1988 the upper bound was formulated as v Rd,max = 1.4 v Rd1, where v Rd1 follows from Eq. 6.31b. In a redraft in 1991 this value was increased to 1.6 v Rd1. This upper limit will, however, hardly be reached in practical situations, where normal punching shear reinforcement is used. However, using shear heads and shear studs, which can be more efficient than stirrups as shear reinforcement, higher values of the upper punching capacity than 1.6v Rd1 can be reached. Therefore a Page 6-29

120 Guide to EC2 Section 6 modified upper limit has been defined according to MC 90, according to V Rd,max = 0.5 f cd u 0 d (6.40) where u 0 is the length of the column periphery, and is equal to = 0.60 (1-f ck /250) (6.41) The distance from the column to the inner shear reinforcement should not be larger than 0.5d, nor should it be less than 0.3d, since steel closer than this will not be well anchored in the compression zone if intersected by cracks at lower inclinations (Regan [24]). The distance between the layers of shear reinforcement in radial direction should not be larger than 0.75d. It should be verified that no punching failure occurs outside the outermost layer of shear reinforcement. Therefore an additional perimeter u n is defined at a distance of 1,5d from the outermost shear reinforcement. It should be shown that here v Ed < 0.12 k (100 l f ck) 1/ cp (6.42) where v Ed is the design calculated of the ultimate shear stress on the perimeter u n, see fig Figure Control perimeter un at interior column Practically the design of the shear reinforcement is quite simple. At first at the perimeter with distance 2d from the loaded area the punching capacity is checked and the eventual shear reinforcement is calculated. Then the perimeter is determined for which v Ed < v Rd,c. Finally the shear reinforcement (with the same cross section per unit area) is extended to a distance 1,5d from the outer perimeter Basic equation for eccentric punching In the draft of 1988 only a very general approach as in combination with a bending moment. The design punching shear stress v Ed was formulated as v Ed = (V Ed)/(u.d) (6.43) where V Ed design value of the punching shear factor taking account of the expected effect of eccentricity, in the absence of a more rigorous analysis. No further indication on what this more rigorous analysis means was given. In Fig the values for the eccentricity factor are given. Figure Approximate values for eccentricity factor in new draft Complementary to this simplified approach the more accurate method, given in MC 90 has been adopted in prenv :2001. This method takes the effect of an unbalanced moment into account with the formulation: V Ed = V Ed/(u 1d) + (KM Ed)/(W 1d) (6.44) u where W 1 is a function of the control perimeter u 1: 1 W1 0 ed The property W 1 corresponds to a type of plastic distribution of the shear stresses as illustrated in Page 6-30

121 Guide to EC2 Section 6 Fig An analysis by Mast [34,35] on the basis of an elastic analysis of the distribution of shear stresses in a slab in the vicinity of a column showed that those stresses approach the distribution shown in Fig quite well. For a rectangular column W 1 follows from W 1= c c 1 c c 2d d 2 + 2dc 1 (6.45) Figure Shear distribution due to an unbalanced moment at a slab internal column connection K is a factor taking into consideration that a bending moment in the slab, is only sustained by bending in the column but also by bending and torsion in the slab itself. K follows from the table below For round columns c 1/c 2 = 1 so K = 0.6. With this approach the shear capacity depends on the column size and the value of the unbalanced moment and is therefore much more accurate than from Eq Fig shows Eq in comparison with tests results. The diagram is a combination of two figures, from Regan [24,36]. Fig Comparison of Eq. 11 with test on interior column slab connections The method can be as well applied to edge and corner columns. However, in those cases the ultimate punching shear stress can as well be calculated in a simplified way assuming uniform shear on the reduced perimeter shown in Fig Figure Reduced perimeters for assumed uniform shear for edge and corner columns Page 6-31

122 Guide to EC2 Section Punching shear in column bases The most important difference between punching of a slab around a column and punching of column base supporting a column is the presence of a significant counter pressure from the soil. A second difference is that the distance from columns to the edges of their bases are commonly much smaller than those to sections of radial contra flexure in suspended slabs [38]. Due to the influence of the vertical soil pressure, the inclination of the punching cone in column bases may well be steeper than in suspended slabs, which gives rise to uncertainty with regard to the critical perimeter to be checked. This was not regarded in the EC-2 version of The CE Model Code 1990 gives an alternative, in which the position of the control perimeter is treated as a variable and the unit punching resistance, is taken to vary with the distance from the column to the control perimeter, i.e. with the inclination of the failure surface. For concentric loading the design punching force is V Ed,red = V Ed - V Ed (6.46) where V Ed column load V Ed the upward force within the control perimeter considered i,e. upward pressure from soil minus self weight of base v Ed = V Ed,red/ud (6.47) where u is the control perimeter taking a value a < 2d instead of 2d into account (see also fig. 6.37). The nominal ultimate shear stress at the perimeter is v Rdc = 0,12 k(100f ck ) 1/3 2d/a < 0.5f cd (6.48) where a distance from the periphery of the control perimeter considered 0.60 (1 - f ck /250) (6.49) Fig shows a result of a parameter study, carried out with the previous equations. For many combinations of base width to column width l/c and column width to effective slab depth c/d the critical ratio a crit /d has been determined, for which the lowest column load is obtained. The results are shown in Fig It turns out that the ultimate column load is a function of the based to column width l/c but is independent of the ratio c/d. In the lower diagram of fig the design column load V Ed can immediately be determined as a function of the ratio l/c. The corresponding value of the critical control perimeter a crit /d is read in the upper diagram. It can be seen that in the utmost number of cases the value of a crit is smaller than 2d, which means indeed that the inclination of the punching cone is much steeper than in suspended slabs. Figure Shear capacity of column bases 6.5 Design with strut and tie models 6.6 Anchorages and laps 6.7 Partially loaded areas 6.8 Fatigue See example n. 6.8 to 6.14 See example n No comments No comments Page 6-32

123 Guide to EC2 Section 6 REFERENCES Shear Aparicio,A., Calavera, J., del Pozo, F.J.,(2000) Testing strut compression shear failure in beams, Polytechnic University of Barcelona. Asin, M. (2000), The behaviour of reinforced concrete deep beams, PhD-Thesis, Delft University of Technology, The Netherlands. Aster, H., Koch, R. (1974), Schubtragfähigkeit dicker Stahlbetonplatten, Beton- und Stahlbetonbau, 11/1974 Baldwin, J.W., Viest, I.M. (1958), Effect of axial compression in shear strength of reinforced concrete frame members, ACI-Journal, Vol. 30, No. 4, Nov. 1958, pp Bennett, E.W., Balasoorya, B.M.A.(1971), Shear strength of prestressed beams with thin webs failing in inclined compression, ACI-Journal, March Bennett,E.W.,Debaiky, S.Y. (1974), High strength steel as shear reinforcement in prestressed concrete beams, ACI Special Publication 42, Vol. I, pp , Bernaert, S., and Siess, O.(1956), Strength of shear in reinforced concrete beams under uniform loading, University of Illinois, June Bhide, S.B., Collins, M.P.,(1989) Influence of Axial Tension on the Shear Capacity of Reinforced Concrete Members, ACI Journal Sept.-Oct. 1989, pp Chen Ganwei (1988), Plastic Analysis of Shear in Beams, Deep, Beams and Corbels, Department of Structural Engineering, Technical; University of Denmark, Serie R, No. 237, Clark, A.P. (1951), Diagonal tension in reinforced concrete beams, ACI Journal Vol. 32, No. 2, October 1951, pp De Cossio, R.D., Siess, C.P. (1960), Behavior and strength in shear of beams and frames without web reinforcement, ACI-Journal, Feb. 1960, pp Fouré, B. (2000), Proposal for rewriting item in section 6.2 (Ultimate Limit State Shear, Note to Project Team for EC-2, May 2000 (unpublished). Görtz, S., Hegger, J (1999), Shear Capacity of Prestressed Concrete Beams of HSC Elements, Symposium Utilization of High Strength/ High performance Concrete, Sandefjord, Norway, June 1999, proceedings, Vol. 1, pp Hamadi, Y.D. and Regan, P.E. (1980), Behavior of normal and lightweight aggregate beams with shear cracks, The Structural Engineer, Vol. 58B No. 4, December 1980, pp Hanson, J.M., Hulsbos, C.L. (1964), Ultimate shear tests on prestressed concrete Ibeams under concentrated and uniform loading, PCI-Journal, June 1964, pp Hedman, O., Losberg, A. (1978), Design of concrete structures with regard to shear forces, CEB Bulletin d Information No. 126, pp , Hognestadt, E.,Elstner, R.C. (1957), Laboratory investigation of rigid frame failure, ACI Journal, V. 53 No. 1, Jan 1957, pp Kani, G.N.J. (1966), Basic Facts Concerning Shear Failure, ACI-Journal 64, (1966), No. 6, pp König, G., Fischer, J. (1995), Model Uncertainties concerning Design Equations for the Shear Capacity of Concrete Members without Shear Reinforcement, CEB Bulletin 224, July 1995, pp Krefeld, W.J., and Thurston, C.W. (1966), Studies of the shear and diagonal tension strength of simply supported reinforced concrete beams, ACI Journal, Vol. 63, No. 4, April 1966, pp Küng, R., Ein Beitrag zur Schubsicherung im Stahlbetonbau, Betonstahl in Entwicklung, Heft 33, Tor-Esteg Steel Corporation, Luxemborg. Lehwalter, N. (1988), The bearing capacity of concrete struts in strut and tie models exemplified for the case of short beams, PhD-Thesis, Darmstadt University of Technology, Germany (in German). Leonhardt, F., Walther, R. (1961), The Stuttgart shear tests 1961, Series of papers in Beton - und Stahlbetonbau, Leonhardt, F., Koch, R., Rostsy, F., (1973), Schubversuche an Spannbetonträgern, Deutscher Ausschuss für Stahlbeton, Heft 227, Berlin. Levi, F., Marro, P. (1993), Shear tests on HSC prestressed beams proposals of new interpretative models, Conference on High Strength Concrete 1993, Lillehammer June, Proceedings, pp Page 6-33

124 Guide to EC2 Section 6 Leung, Y.W., Chew, C.B. and Regan, P.E. (1976), Shear strength of various shapes of concrete beams without shear reinforcement, Polytechnic of Central London, Lyngberg, B.S., (1976), Ultimate shear resistance of partially prestressed concrete Ibeams, ACI-Journl, April 1976, pp Mathey, R.G., Watstein, D. (1963), Shear strength of beams without web reinforcement containing deformed bars of different yield strengths, ACI Journal Vol. 60., No. 2, Feb. 1963, pp Moayer, H. and Regan, P.E., (1974) Shear strength of prestressed and reinforced concrete T-beams, ACI Special Publication 42, Vol 1, pp , Morrow, J., Viest,.M. (1957), Shear strength of reinforced concrete beams, ACI Journal, Vol. 28, No. 9, March 1957, pp Muhidin, N.A. and Regan, P.E. (1977), Chopped steel fibres as shear reinforcement in concrete beams, Fibre reinforced materials design and engineering applications, Proceedings of a conference, Institution of Civil Engineers, London 1977, pp Nielsen, M.P. (1990), Commentaries on Shear and Torsion, Eurocode 2 editorial Group 1st draft October PrEN 1990, Eurocode: Basis of Structural Design, Stage 34, Draft version Dec Regan, P.E. (1971), Shear in reinforced concrete an experimental study, Technical Note 45, CIRIA, London. Regan, P.E. (1999), Ultimate Limit State Principles: Basic design for moment, shear and torsion, in fib Text Book on Structural Concrete, Vol. 2, pp Regan, P.E., Reza-Jorabi, H. (1987), The shear resistance of reinforced concrete Ibeams, Studi e Ricerche, Politecnico di Milano, Vol 19, 1987, pp Regan, P.E. (1998), Enhancement of shear resistance in short shear spans of reinforced concrete, an evaluation of UK recommendations and particularly of BD- 44/95, University of Westminster, London, 1998 (14 pages). Regan, P.E. (2000), Aspects of diagonal tension in reinforced concrete, Structural Concrete, Journal of fib, No. 13, 2000, Sept Rogowski, D.M., MacGregor, J.G. (1983), Shear strength of deep reinforced concrete continuous beams, Structural Engineering Report, No. 11., University of Alberta, Nov Rüsch, H., Haugli, F.R., Mayer, H. (1962), Shear tests on rectangular reinforced concrete beams with uniformly distributed loads, Deutscher Ausschuss für Stahlbeton, Berlin, Heft 145 (in German). Sörensen, H.C. (1974). Shear tests on 12 reinforced concrete T-beams, report R60, Structural research Laboratory, Technical University of Denmark, Taerwe, L.R. (1993), Toward a consistent treatment of model uncertainties in reliability formats for concrete structures, CEB Bulletin d Ínformation 219, Safety and Performance Concepts, pp Walraven, J.C. (1978), The influence of member depth on the shear strength of normal and lightweight concrete beams without shear reinforcement, Stevin Report , Delft University of Technology, Walraven, J.C. (1987), Shear in prestressed concrete, CEB-Bulletin d Information Nr. 180, 144 pages. Walraven, J.C., Lehwalther, N. (1989), The bearing capacity of concrete struts in strut and tie models exemplified for the case of short beams, Beton-und Stahlbetonbau, Heft 4, April 89, pp (in German). Walraven, J.C., Lehwalther, N. (1994), Size effects in short beams loaded in shear, AC_ - Structural Journal, Vol. 91., No. 5., Sept.-Oct. 1994, pp Walraven, J.C., Al-Zubi, N. (1995), Shear capacity of lightweight concrete beams with shear reinfocement, Proceedings Symposium on Lightweight Aggregate Concrete, Sandefjord, Norway, Vol. 1, pp Walraven, J.C., Stroband, J. (1999), Shear capacity of high strength concrete beams with shear reinforcement, Symposium on High Strength Concrete, Sandefjord, Norway, June 1999, Proceedings Vol. 1. pp Page 6-34

125 Guide to EC2 Section 6 Punching 1. Walraven, J.C.; CEB-Bulletin d'lnformation 180, Shear in Prestressed Concrete pp Kinnunen, S., H. Nylander; Punching of concrete slabs without shear reinforcement, Transactions of the Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm, Civil Engineering 3,Nr. 158, Marti, P, J. Pralong, B. Thurlimann; Schubversuche an Stahlbetonplatten, Institut fur Baustik und Konstruktion, ETH Zurich, Berich Nr , Birkhauser Verlag Basel, September Seible, F., A. Ghali, W.H. Digler; Preassembled shear reinforcing units for flat plates, ACI- Journal, Jan-Feb. 1980, pp Pralong, J., w. Briindli, B. Thurlimann; "Durchstanzversuche an Stahlbeton-und Spannbetonplatten", Institut fur Baustatik und Kkonstruktion, EHT ZUrich, Bericht Nr , Birkhiiuser Verlag Basel, December Franz, G.; "Versuche an Stahlbetonkorper der Flachdecke im Stiitzenbereich-Versuchsreihen I en II, Institut fur Beton- und Stahlbetonbau," TH Karlruhe, 1963 und Base, G.D.;CEB-BulletinNr.57, 1968,pp Tolf, P.; "Effect of slab thickness on punching shear strength of concrete slabs. Tests on circular slabs", Bulletin 146, Dept. of Structural Mechanics and Engineering, Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm (in Swedish with summary in English). 9. Marzouk, H., A. Hussein; "Experimental investigation on the behavior of high strength concrete slabs" ACI-Structural Journal, Vol. 88, No.6, American Concrete Institute, Detroit, pp Tomaszewicz, A.; "High-Strength.SP2 -Plates and Shells, Report 2.3 "Punching shear capacity of reinforced concrete slabs", Report No. STF70 A93082, SINTEF Structures and Concrete, Trondheim, 36 pp. 11. Regan P.F., A. Al-Hussaini, K.E. Ramdane, H.Y. Xue; "Behavior of high strength concrete slabs", Proceedings of the international conference Concrete 2000, Sept. 7-9, 1993, Vol. 1, pp Hallgren, M; "Punching shear tests on reinforced high strength concrete slabs", KTH Stockholm, Technical Report 1994, No.14. Structural Mechanics. 13. Taerwe, L.R.; "Towards a consistent treatment of model uncertainties in reliability formats for concrete structures", CEB-Bulletin d'information 219, "Safety and Performance Concepts", p Konig, G., Fischer, J,,"Mode1 Uncertainties concerning Design Equations for the Shear Capacity of Concrete Members without Shear Reinforcement", in CEB Bulletin 224, Model Uncertainties, July 1995, pp Kinnunen, S., Nylander, H., "Punching of Concrete Slabs without Shear Reinforcement" Meddelande N. 38, Institutionen for Byggnadstatik, Kungilga Tekniska Hogskolan, Stockholm Moe, J.,"Shearing strength of reinforced concrete slabs and footings under concentrated loads" Development Department Bulletin d47, Portland Cement Association, Apri Herzog, M.,"Der Durchstandswiderstand von Stahlbetonplatten nach neu ausgewerteten Versuchen", Ostereichische Ingenieurzeitschrift, Vol. 14, 1971, Nr. 6, pp , Nr. 7. Pp Petcu, V., Stanculescu, G., Pancaldi, U., "Punching strength predictions for two-way reinforced concrete slabs", Revue Romaine des Sciences Techniques: serie de la mechanique applique, No 2, March/Apri11979, Rumania. 19. Kordina, K., No1ting, D., "Shear capacity of reinforced concrete s1abs subjected to punching", Deutscher Ausschuss fur Stahlbeton, Nr. 371, Berlin, 1986 (in German) 20. Elstner, R.C., Hognestad, E., "Shearing strength of reinforced concrete slabs", ACI Journal, Vo1. 53, July 1956, pp Regan, P.E., "Single legged stirrups as shear reinforcement in reinforced concrete flat slabs", Structures Research Group, Polytecnic of Central London, Gomes, R.B.,"Punching resistance of reinforced concrete flat slabs",phd-thesis, Polytechnic of Central London, Gomes, R.B., Andrade, M.A.S.,"Punching in reinforced concrete flat s1abs with holes", Developments in Computor Aided Design and Modeling for Structural Engineering, Civil- Comp Press,, Edingburgh, pp Regan, P.E., "Ultimate Limit State Principles", Model Code Text Book, Part 7.4 Punching, in fib- Page 6-35

126 Guide to EC2 Section 6 Bulletin 2, Structural Concrete, July, 1999, Vol. 2, pp Yitzhaki, R., "Punching strength of reinforced concrete slabs", ACI Journal Vol. 63, Nr. 5, Mau 1966, pp Stamencovic, A., Chapman, J.C., "Local strength of flat slabs at column heads", 27. Report Nr. 39, Construction Industry Research and Information Association, London, Shehata, L.A.E., "Puncionamento assimetrico em lajes de concreto, COPPE/UFRJ, Rio de Janeiro, Regan, P.E., "Behaviour of reinforced concrete flat slabs", Report No.89, Construction Industry Research and Information Association, London Hanson, N.W., Hanson, J.M., "Shear and moment transfer between concrete slabs and columns", Portland Cement Association, Development Bulletin D129, Jan 196B. 31. Islam, S., Park, R.,"Tests on slab-column connections with shear and unbalanced flexure, Journal of the Structural Division, Proceedings, ASCE, Vol No ST3, March 1976, pp Anis, N.N.,"Shear strength of reinforced concrete flat PhD slabs without shear reinforcement", Thesis Imperial College, London, Narasimhan, N., "Shear reinforcement in reinforced concrete column heads", PhDThesis, Imperial College, London Hawkins, N.M., Bao, A., Yamazaki,J.,"Moment transfer from concrete slabs to columns", ACI Structural Journal, v. 86, No.6, Nov-Dec. 1998, pp Mast, P.E., "Stresses in flat plates near columns", ACI Journal, Oct. 1970, pp Mast, P.E.,"Plate stresses at columns near to free edges", ACI Journal, Nov. 1970, pp Regan, P.E., "Explanatory notes on proposed Model Code (MC'90)", Note to CEB Commission IV, May 8th Regan. P.E., Braestrup. M.W., "Punching shear in reinforced concrete", CEB-Bulletin d'information No.168, Jan Lucio, V.J.G., Appleton, J.A.S., Almeida, J.P., "Ultimate limit state of punching in the (fib) FIP Recommendations for the design of post-tensioned slabs and foundations", Structural Concrete, Journal of fib, 2000, 1, No.3, Sept Andersson, J.L., "Genomstansning ay lift slabs (Punching of lift slabs)", Nordisk Betong, Year 7,1963, H.3, pp Gerber, L.L., Burns, N.H., "Ultimate strength tests of post-tensioned flat plates", PCIJournal, Nov/Dec. 1971, pp Stahlton, A.G., "Flat slabs with Stahlton column strip prestressing", unpublished Report of Stahlton AG, Zurich, 1974/75 (in German). 43. Pralong, J., Brandli, W., Thurimann, B., Punching tests on reinforced and prestressed slabs", Institute for Building Statics and Structural Design", ETH Zurich, Report Nr , Birkhiiuser Verlag Basel, December 1979 (in German). 44. Kordina, K., Nolting, D.,"Tests on shear in slabs, prestressed with unbonded tendons", Report of the Institute for Materials, Concrete Structures and Fire, TU Braunschweig, September 1984 (in German). Page 6-36

127 Guide to EC2 Section 7 SECTION 7. SERVICEABILITY LIMIT STATES (SLS) 7.1 General 7.2 Stress limitation 7.3 Crack control General considerations Minimum reinforcement areas SECTION 7. SERVICEABILITY LIMIT STATES See example n. 7.1 See example n. 7.3 C7.3.2 Formula for minimum reinforcement Formula 7.1 of pren can be partially deduced by expressing the condition that the minimum reinforcement should be able to withstand the cracking moment working at a certain stress s f yk. Figure 7.1 Minimum reinforcement concept For a rectangular cross section subject to combined bending and axial force, the cracking moment can be determined by: 1 NEd h Mcr fct, eff Act h hcr (7.1) After cracking this same bending moment, together with the axial force, must be taken by the cracked cross section: 1 NEd h h fct, eff Act h hcr Ass zned 0,9hz (7.2) The lever arm z, may be taken as a certain fraction of h (around 0.8h for pure bending). Introducing the following notation: N z Act bhcr Ed c h bh Equation above can be rewritten as: 1, 1 c h fct eff Act 1 3 0,9 1 As s 3 f (7.3) ct, eff h cr f A k A (7.4) ct, eff ct c s s The above value of k c is valid only if > 0, since the deduction assumes that there is a part of the cross section which is in compression. In order to approximate k c in the following figure the value of NEd =z/h is plotted against the adimensional axial force within a range of to Over bhfck 0.03, there is no compression block and under 0.22 there is no need to provide minimum reinforcement according to the principle established above. Factor alpha=z/h as a function of adimensional axial force Figure 7.2 Value of as a function of the axial force It can be seen from the above figure that it is reasonable to assume a value of 0.8 for parameter. With this assumption and for compression force or moderate tensile force, the values of k c may be estimated as: c h kc 0,4 1 10,7 (7.5) fct, eff h cr h cr can be computed as a function of the axial compression and the tensile strength of concrete. Page 7-1

128 Guide to EC2 Section 7 The cracking moment is given by the following condition: 2 NEd Mcr Mcr bh fct, eff c M 2 cr fct, eff c (7.6) bh bh bh 6 The depth of the tensile zone prior to cracking, relative to the centre of gravity of the cross section, is given by the condition that the stress be nil when the existing axial force is applied together with the cracking moment: Mcr c h 0c 12x x (7.7) 3 bh f 2 ct, eff c Therefore, h cr can be calculated as: h h, c h fct eff c hcr x 1 2 (7.8) 2 2 fct, eff c h cr f ct, eff Introducing equation (7.8) in (7.5), the expression of k c becomes: fct, eff c k 0,4 1 c c 11,4 f ct, eff f (7.9) ct, eff In the following figure the value of k c is plotted against c for a value of f ct,eff of 2.9 Mpa according to both the above formulation and the equation of pren. Figure 7.3. Value of kc as a function of the axial force In the next figure the minimum reinforcement for a section subject to a compressive force (expressed in terms of a reduced axial force) is shown calculated according to 4 different methods: - Proposal of pren - Compensation of tension block. This procedure is on the safe side since it neglects the increase of the lever arm which occurs after cracking. - Direct calculation (exact determination of ) - Procedure explained above in which is taken as a constant equal to 0.8. Figure 7.4. Comparison of different approximate expressions for the calculation of the minimum reinforcement It can be seen that the 2 last methods give almost the same results. It can also be seen that the formula of pren is mostly on the safe side. Page 7-2

129 Guide to EC2 Section Control of cracking without direct calculation C Formula for maximum bar diameter In this paragraph the formula for the maximum bar diameter is deduced for three crack width formulations: MC-90 [3], EC2 [4] and pren. This deduction, as will be seen, requires the introduction of simplifications and the assumption that the steel ratio, for which a certain stress s is achieved corresponds to the minimum steel ratio given by pren equation 7.1. This assumption is on the safe side. A more exact formulation could be obtained if eff were to remain a variable. C Deduction of formula Using the MC-90 formulation, the crack width is given by: s sr wk 2lt sm cm 1kt (7.10) 3,6eff Es s sr is the stress calculated for the fully cracked cross section for the cracking moment. sr may be calculated by: fct, eff Act kck fct, eff kck hcr sr (7.11) As s, eff 2,5 k' h d In the above expression, k is a factor which is equal to 1 for bending and equal to 2 for tension. Introducing the expression of sr into equation (7.10), and rearranging: 3,6 wkeff = (7.12) fct,effkc hcr 1-kt s,eff s 2,5k' h - d In order to obtain numerical values from this expression, it is necessary to assume values for those coefficients which are not considered as variables in table 7.1. The following values have been assumed to derive table 7.1: k = 1,0 h 0,3 (assumption on safe side) k c = 0,4; k = 1 (pure bending) k t = 0,38 hcr h10 =5 (7.13) h-d 2 h f ct,eff = 2,9 N/mm 2 w k = 0,3 mm With the above values equation (7.12) can be written as: wkeff 1 = (7.14) 1 s 1-0,88 s,eff s The above expression, which is valid only for s > sr, is a function of 3 parameters. Therefore some assumption regarding eff must be made in order to obtain table 7.2. The assumption which will be made is that eff = eff,min (i.e. s = sr). This assumption is justified because lower values of s will not produce cracking and because if cracking does occur, then formula (7.14) will give smaller bar diameters if the smallest the value of eff is used. The value of eff can therefore be taken from the following equation: fct, eff kck hcr eff eff,min (7.15) 2,5 k' hd s If the above value of eff is substituted into Eq. (7.12), this equation can be simplified into: 3,6wf k ct, effkke c s hcr k 2,5 k' hd t s s (7.16) In Table 1 the minimum reinforcement ratio which can to be used in equation (7.14) is given for each stress level. In the same table, the maximum bar diameter obtained using equation (7.14) for w k=0.3 mm and that included in MC-90 Table are also given. Table 7.1. MC-90 - Minimum reinforcement ratio for a given value of s which fulfils the condition s > sr. Value of corresponding max Page 7-3

130 Guide to EC2 Section 7 These results are plotted in the following figure. Figure 7.5. Theoretical and actual values of Dmax, according to MC-90 Using the EC2 formulation, the crack width is given by: 2 s sr w k = 1,7srm sm - cm = 1, ,25k1k (7.17) eff Es s sr is the stress calculated for the fully cracked cross section for the cracking moment. sr may be calculated by: fct,effactkck fct,effkck hcr sr = = (7.18) A 2,5k' h - d s s,eff Introducing the expression of sr into equation (7.10), and rearranging: w k Es eff = -50 (7.19) 2 f s 1 2 ct,effkc h 1,7 0,25k k cr 1-12 s,effs 2,5k' h - d In order to obtain numerical values from this expression, it is necessary to assume values for those coefficients which are not considered as variables in table 7.2. The following values have been assumed to derive table 7.2: k = 1,0 h 0,3 (assumption on safe side) k c = 0,4; k = 1 (pure bending) hcr h10 =5 (7.20) h-d 2 h f ct,eff = 2,5 N/mm = 0,50 0,25 k 1k 2 = 0,10 With the above values equation (7.19) can be written as: w k = -5010eff (7.21) s 1- s,effs Similarly, a value must be given to eff in order to obtain values from this expression. As stated before, it is on the safe side to assume for this purpose that s = sr and that therefore the value of eff can be determined using equation (7.15). With this assumption, equation (7.19) can be rewritten as: w k E fct,effkck s hcr = (7.22) ,7s 0,25k1k 2 2,5k' h - d s s In the following table, the results obtained by application of the above formula and the values of max according to EC2 are compared. Page 7-4

131 Guide to EC2 Section 7 Table 7.2 EC2 - Minimum reinforcement ratio for a given value of s which fulfils the condition s > sr. Value of corresponding max In the following graph, the above results are plotted. Fig 7.6. Theoretical and actual values of Dmax, according to EC2 Using the pren formulation, the crack width is given by: s sr w k = 1,7srmsm - cm= 3,4c + 0,425k1k 2 1- kt (7.23) eff Es s sr is the stress calculated for the fully cracked cross section for the cracking moment. sr may be calculated by: fct,effactkck fct,effkck hcr sr = = (7.24) A 2,5k' h - d s s,eff Introducing the expression of sr into equation (7.23), and rearranging: w k Es eff = - 3,4c (7.25) 2 f s 1 2 ct,effkc h 0,425k k cr 1-k t s,effs 2,5k' h - d In order to obtain numerical values from this expression, it is necessary to assume values for those coefficients which are not considered as variables in table 7.2. The following values have been assumed to derive table 7.2: k = 1,0 h 0,3 (assumption on safe side) k c = 0,4; k = 1 (pure bending) hcr h10 =5 (7.26) h-d 2 h f ct,eff = 2,9 N/mm 2 k t = 0,40 0,425 k 1k 2 = 0,17 C = 25 mm With the above values equation (7.25) can be written as: Page 7-5

132 Guide to EC2 Section wk = - 855,88eff (7.27) 0,928 s 1- s,effs The above expression is a function of 3 parameters and again can be simplified with the assumptions explained above, into: w k E fct,effkck s hcr ,65 = -3,4c -85 (7.28) 1- kt s s0,425k1k 2 2,5k' h - d s s This curve is represented in the following figure and given in numerical form in table 7.3. It can be seen that good agreement is obtained between theory and pren table. The small differences observed are due to the need to use commercial bar diameters in table 7.3. Table 7.3 prenv - Minimum reinforcement ratio for a given value of s which fulfils the condition s > sr. Value of corresponding max Figure 7.7. Theoretical and actual values of Dmax, according to pren The three formulas analyzed are compared in the following graph. It can be seen that the theoretical results for EC-2 and pren are very similar while the MC-90 equation is somewhat more conservative. The values included in the tables of the codes do not always match the theoretical equation but are generally conservative for EC2 and pren. The MC90 table values are somewhat above the theoretical curve as already shown before. Figure 7.8 Theoretical and actual values of Dmax. Comparison of the 3 models considered Page 7-6

133 Guide to EC2 Section Correction for cover In the above expressions it has been assumed that h d 0,1h and also that a problem of pure bending is being analysed and therefore, h cr = 0.5h, k c = 0.4 and k =1. Furthermore, the tensile strength of concrete has been assumed to be 2.9 N/mm 2 (2.5 in case of EC2). If different values are assumed for these parameters, then the value obtained from the tables must be corrected by the following factor: fct,eff k c hcr 0,1h k' fct,eff kchcr 1 Part of cross section compressed: = (7.29) 2,9 0,4 0,5h h - d 1 2,9 2 h - d 1 Cross section in tension: fct,eff k c hcr 0,1h 1 fct,eff kchcr 1 = 2,9 0,4 0,5h h - d k' 2,9 2 h - d 2 (7.30) It can therefore be written that: f kh * ct,eff c cr s = s part of section compressed (7.31a) 2,9 2 h - d f kh * ct,eff c cr s = s all section in tension (7.31b) 2,9 4 h - d Calculation of crack widths C Formula for crack width Introduction The formula proposed for crack width is a mixture of EC2 and MC90. In order to evaluate the accuracy of this formula, it has been tested against an experimental data base including results from the researchers Rehm & Rüsch [11-13], Krips [9], Falkner [6], Elighausen [5], Hartl [7], Beeby [1,2] and Jaccoud [8]. The data base has been drafted specifically for this document and is detailed in appendix A. The criteria for the selection of the experimental results are clearly explained below. It is the intention of the authors to avoid ambiguity and provide a self explaining instrument which can be used by other researchers in the future so that the work carried out here need not be repeated. A detailed presentation of this data base is therefore given. After a review of the proposed model, the results of the comparison between model and experimental data are presented. The performance of the new pren formula is also compared to that of MC-90 and EC2. The results show small differences between the 3 models. The analysis, however, shows that for all 3 models, the error margin grows as the crack width grows and that all models tend to underestimate the crack width when it is large. This fact is unfortunate since the control of cracking in normal structures is most important when cracks are large. This fact suggests that in future editions of EC2, some correction might be needed to allow for this situation Proposed formulation According to the pren proposal, the design crack width can be determined using the following expression: w k = s rm ( sm cm) where w k design crack width s rmax maximum crack spacing sm mean strain in the reinforcement, under the relevant combination of loads, taking into account the effects of tension stiffening, etc. cm mean strain in concrete between cracks The strain difference ( sm - cm) may be calculated from the expression: fctm s -kt 1+ eff s eff s sm - cm = -k tsr = 0,6 (7.32) Es Es Es where s stress in the tension reinforcement assuming a cracked section. fctm 1-eff sr eff = This is a simplification which is exact for pure tension but not for E E sr sr s s bending. However, this simplification makes it easier to apply the model in practical cases and does not imply any significant loss of accuracy as is shown below. e ratio E s/e c As p,eff = A c A c,eff effective tension area. A c,eff is the area of concrete surrounding the tension reinforcement of depth, h c,ef, where h c,ef is the lesser of 2,5(h-d), (h-x)/3 or h/2 (see figure). Page 7-7

134 Guide to EC2 Section 7 k t factor dependent on the duration of the load k t = 0,6 for short term loading k t = 0,4 for long term loading a) Beam b) Slab A - level of steel centroid B - effective tension area B - effective tension area c) Member in tension B - effective tension area for upper surface C - effective tension area for lower surface Figure 7.9 Definition of the effective tension area In situations, where bonded reinforcement is fixed at reasonably close spacing within the tension zone (spacing 5(c+/2), the maximum final crack spacing can be calculated from the expression: s = 3,4c + 0,425k k (7.33) where c k 1 k 2 rmax 1 2 eff bar diameter. cover to the reinforcement coefficient which takes account of the bond properties of the bonded reinforcement; k 1 = 0.8 for high bond bars k 1= 1.6 for bars with an effectively plain surface coefficient which takes account of the distribution of strain; k 2 = 0.5 for bending k 2= 1.0 for pure tension For cases of eccentric tension or for local areas, intermediate values of k 2 should be used which can be calculated from the relation: 1+ 2 k 2 = (7.34) 2 1 Where 1 is the greater and 2 is the lesser tensile strain at the boundaries of the section considered, assessed on the basis of a cracked section. As can be seen, with regard to crack spacing, the cover, c, is introduced explicitly into the expression of the crack width as suggested by A. Beeby. This suggestion is backed up by the following figure, taken from reference [1], which clearly shows the dependence of the crack spacing on this parameter. In EC2, c is implicitly taken as 25 mm. Page 7-8

135 Guide to EC2 Section 7 Fig.7.10 Influence of cover on the transfer length acccording to Beeby [1] Also, on a formal level, the formula of pren gives s rmax instead of s rm. s rmax is obtained as 1.7 times s rm. Thus, 1, ,25k k (7.35) 1 2 p,eff of EC2 becomes 3,4c + 0,425k k (7.36) 1 2 p,eff of pren. In the case in which 2 different bar diameters are used, an equivalent diameter eq has to be determined in order to apply the above formulation. In EC2 [4] it is recommended to use the average diameter m. MC90[3] and pren [10] suggest for this case the equivalent diameter eq, although MC90 provides no definition of eq. The definition of eq depends on the definition of eff. To show the difference, first m will be applied to the equilibrium equation (7.33) to derive eq and then eq will be derived by considering 2 diameters in the determination of the steel area (7.35). fctm A ctm = n lt (7.37) (7.33) changes in case of the use of 2 different diameters into (7.34). f A = n +n l (7.38) ctm ctm 1 2 t Hence: fctmactm l t = n +n 1 2 (7.39) since s rmax = 2l t and s rmax = /3.6 and, according to MC90[5] fctm 1 2f ctma A ct,eff ct,eff eq =, it can be written: s rmax = =2 (7.40) 1,80 n 11+n2 2 eq 1, From (7.36) can be seen that the equivalent diameter is: n 11+n22 eq = = m n+n 1 2 As This is correct when the steel section in = A is defined with 2 eq ct,eff A = n +n s (7.41) If this is not the case, and the steel area is instead described by n 2 A s =n 1 +n2 4 4 then, 1 1 +n2 2 A 4 c,eff = and therefore 2 2 f n 11 +n22 ctm s rmax =2 (7.42) n +n From (1.38) can be derived that the equivalent diameter is: eq 2 2 n 11 +n22 = (7.43) n +n It can be seen that EC2 and MC90 could be misleading and thus should be clarified, since the code user will naturally define eff as A s/a c,eff. For this reason the definition of eq is made explicit in pren. Page 7-9

136 Guide to EC2 Section Presentation of data base As stated above, the data base includes data from different researchers. The data has been selected among the different tests available following a few simple rules: - The materials used in the tests need to be similar to the materials used today in the building of structures. This rule leads to discard tests which use low bond rebars, or concrete qualities less than 20 N/mm 2 and steel qualities of less than 400 N/mm 2. - The stress range should be a serviceability range. For this purpose, only results within a stress range in steel from 150 to 350 N/mm 2 were considered for tests involving direct actions. For indirect actions, steel stresses up to the yielding stress of steel were considered, since theses test can be representative of walls subject to shrinkage and temperature. - For the determining of the crack spacing the number of cracks present at the last phase of the test is always considered since it is the closest to stabilized cracking, which is the crack spacing given in equation (7.32) Analysis of the experimental data This paragraph includes the analysis of the experimental data as well as the comparison between the values obtained from the experimental data base and the values obtained from the theoretical models. The comparison includes not only the pren model, but also those of EC2 and MC-90, in order to verify a satisfactory performance of the new proposal. Experimental data generally includes the values for the mean crack width and, in most cases, also for the maximum crack width. The models are compared on the basis of the mean crack width because it is difficult to determine the experimental characteristic crack width. However, since in many of the experimental results the maximum crack width is also available, first an analysis of the distribution function of the maximum crack width is made, since this analysis provides some interesting conclusions. For this the results of Rehm & Rüsch [11-13] are used Probability function of the maximum crack width In this paragraph a first analysis of the probability distribution of the maximum crack width is made. Figure 11 shows the crack width distribution function for all selected members within the service stress range. The distribution function of the maximum crack widths shows clearly a tendency to a normal distribution. Equation (7.44) shows the mathematical equation for the normal distribution function. This expression is also plotted in Figure 7.11 showing very close agreement with the experimental data. f x,, = 1 e 2 2 x (7.44) Fig Maximum experimental crack width distribution Having proven that it is reasonable to assume that the probability distribution of the maximum crack width can be assumed is a normal distribution, the distribution and the density functions were evaluated for each stress level within the service spectrum: 200 N/mm 2, 250 N/mm 2, 300 N/mm 2 and 350 N/mm 2. These functions are displayed in Figure 7.12 (distribution function) and Figure 7.13 (density function). The division of the results into different stress levels shows the evolution of the maximum crack width as a function of the stress level. Figure 7.12 shows the distribution of the crack width for the different stress levels. It can be seen that for a stress level of 200 N/mm 2 there is a probability of 95% that a maximum crack width smaller than 0.3 mm occurs. This is consistent with the available experience. It can be stated that for normal durability conditions, stress levels under 250 N/mm 2 will not pose any Page 7-10

137 Guide to EC2 Section 7 serious cracking problems Figure Normal distribution of the maximum crack width for different stress levels The density curves show the concentration of the crack opening. It can be seen in Figure 7.13, which crack opening is typical for a certain stress level. Fig Density curves of the maximum crack width for different stress levels This shows, that in the given data, a maximum crack width of 0.19 mm is typical for a steel stress of 200 N/mm 2, 0.25 mm for 250 N/mm 2 and so on Comparison of the standards In this paragraph a direct comparison between the formulae according to [3,4,10] is presented. This comparison shows the performance of the formulae, not only against each other, but also against the test results. Since pren and MC-90 provide the characteristic crack width, the mean crack width has been estimated by dividing the value given by these codes by 1.7 and 1.5 respectively, since these are the values they assume. In Figure 7.14, all the data obtained by the evaluation of the experimental results and all the data obtained by processing the corresponding input results according to the standards, is displayed. Figure 14 Comparison test-calc., acc. to EC2, MC90 and PrEN Page 7-11

138 Guide to EC2 Section 7 All 3 formulae perform quite closely to each other. This is shown by the corresponding trend lines. A better view of this information can be obtained by plotting the error of the estimation instead of the crack value. The error is defined as: w m w m,exp (7.45) This result is given in the following graph and table: Figure 7.15 Error in crack width prediction Table 7.4. Errors in crack width prediction The above table shows the mean value of the error, its standard deviation and the 95% confidence intervals (assuming a normal distribution for the error) For example the mean error according to EC2 is w error = mm (overestimation). With a 95% probability the underestimation will be less than mm and the overestimation less than of 0.13 mm. A normal distribution was assumed based on the following figure which shows the experimental error compared to normal distribution having approximately the same mean value and standard deviation (the theoretical value of the curve corresponds to EC2, but the values of the 3 models are fairly close). It can be seen that good agreement is found and that the error can effectively be assumed have a normal distribution. Figure 7.16 Distribution function of the error in the estimation of the mean crack width The diagram below shows the density function of the errors of each model. Page 7-12

139 Guide to EC2 Section 7 Figure 7.17 Density function of the error in the estimation of the mean crack width Conclusion With the experimental data gathered, and the selection criteria given above, the crack formulae [3,4,10] proposed for the crack prediction for the 3 different models discussed above was evaluated. During the process of gathering and computing all the result data, three things became manifest: - Within a steel stress limit of 250MPa the crack width does not have to be necessarily checked. This was confirmed by the statistical evaluation, which demonstrated that below 250 N/mm 2 the anticipated maximum crack opening will not exceed a value of 0.4 mm with a plausibility of 95%. - The error of the formulae in the evaluation of the crack width [3,4,10] increases for larger crack openings. Also all models tend to underestimate the crack width when it is large. This is a critical point, because especially for higher steel stresses, the crack opening is expected to be critically larger and the prediction more important than for small cracks under lower steel stress. It might be interesting for future proposals of the EC2 crack prediction formula to provide an adjustment to compensate this tendency. - Nevertheless it could be verified that the existing models, EC2 [4] and MC90 [3] and the PrEN [10], provide acceptable predictions. The mean value of the observed error is in all cases close to zero. Also the standard deviation of this error is relatively small (0.063 to mm). With all this information it can be said, that the PrEN has a good performance range and will be an adequate substitute for the existing EC2 formula Exact derivation s,cr s The EC2 cracking opening formula is: wk 1 k3ck1k2k4 (7.46) Es s s Assuming the prescribed values k 3=3.4, k 4=0.425 and considering the bending case (k 2=0.5) with high bond reinforcement (k 1=0.8), it results s s,cr wk c 0.17 (7.47) Es s s which can be used as a design formula. In particular, for given b, h, d, d, b, and fixed M, we want to deduce the steel reinforcement amount A s and its design tension s in order to have a crack width w k lower than the fixed value w k. The non-dimensional depth of the neutral axis is 1 2 es1 es' 0 (7.48) 2 The steel tension is e fctmkt s n s ' (7.49) M M 0 Assuming Mcr bh kf t ctm 6 2 s 2 e 1 ' 2 we get (7.50) (7.51) Page 7-13

140 Guide to EC2 Section e 2p 3 p 2 2 ' ' 1 where p= s/(k tf ctm) (7.52) When w wk, after some calculations we deduce 0 wk p n 3.4 c 0.17 s s Ew s k setting w0k kf t ctm (7.53) Combining the above equations it results 0 2 e wk 2 e 2 2 ' e ' 3.4 c 0.34 e ' ' 1 ' (7.54) which numerically solved, gives the neutral axis position from which the reinforcement tension and its amount can be determined. If it is not the case, it is necessary to set in the = 2.5 (1-) and then reevaluating, being the value =0.5 practically impossible for bending problems. The procedure, aimed to the determination of the reinforcement amount and its tension corresponding to fixed crack width values and stress level, requires to assume the value of the bars diameter. Alternatively, it is possible to set the tensional level s, for example equal to the limit one, and to evaluate the corresponding reinforcement amount s and the maximal bar diameter. In this case, as the parameter p is defined, the neutral axis is calculated from (7.52), s from (7.50) and the maximal diameter can be derived solving with respect to, which gives s 5.88sw ok max 2c (7.55) (p e) s Approximated derivation The procedure discussed above is quite laborious as it requires iteration. An alternative procedure, easier to be applied, is based on the assumption of a lever arm h 0 = 0.9d constant and independent from.therefore, sa s0.9d=m and s=0.185/(p) (7.56) The general formula for w wk gives s es wk c 0.17 (7.57) Es s p s For further simplification of the problem, assuming =0.9, therefore = and by definition * c w0k 1.18 u1 u2 1 1 (7.58) the following equation is obtained 2 p 5 * 3.4u e * p * 17eu15u20 (7.59) This formula is easy to solve and leads to the desired values s and s. In this case too, for a given value of s, solving for we obtain * * 17c( p e ) 5 wok max * 2 (7.60) e pp that defines the maximal bar diameter, which satisfies the cracking limit state corresponding to a fixed value of the tension in the steel Page 7-14

141 Guide to EC2 Section Deflection control General considerations Cases where calculations may be omitted Checking deflections by calculation C7.4 Discussion of the general method followed for deflection calculation Instantaneous deflections Instantaneous deflections are computed by applying the total load on a structure in which there is a reduction of the stiffness. The law to calculate the reduction of stiffness is deduced from equation 7.8 of pren : 1 M 1 1 M M = = + 1- = 1- (7.61) r EIe rii ri EII EII From this equation, the following relationship is obtained: I II II I e = (7.62) I+ 1- I I II The coefficient applied to the stiffness of each section is obtained as: Ie coef = (7.63) I I Long-term deflections Assumed Load History The load history influences the value of the deflections. In this study a realistic load history has been taken into account. A typical load history for buildings could be: Application of self weight at 10 days Application of the remaining dead load at 60 days Application of quasi-permanent load at 365 days Deflections due to creep Complex Loading History The interpretation of pren regarding deflections due to creep is not clear when the load-history is complex. As described in paragraph , the assumed load history involves 3 dates for the application of the loads: Application of self weight of the structure, g 1 at time t 1 Application of remaining dead load g 2 at time t 2 Application of quasi-permanent live load 02q at t 3 pren proposes to take into account the creep of concrete by using an effective modulus for concrete: 1 E c,eff = (7.64) 1+ The question then arises about which time should be used to compute the creep coefficient. To solve this problem the following procedure is proposed: Compute f g1,(t1, 1) with (t,t 1) and 1. Compute f g1+g2(t2, 2) with (t,t 2) and 2. Compute f g1+g2+q(t3, 3) with (t,t 3) and 3. Compute f q1(t2, 1) with (t,t 2) and 1. Compute f g1+g2(t3, 2) with (t,t 3) and 2 Compute the total deformation by using the following expression: f g1 +g2+q, = f g1,(t1,1) + f g1+g2(t2,2) - f q1(t2,1) + f g1+g2+q(t3,3) - f g1+g2(t3, 2) (7.65) This complicated and time-consuming procedure is necessary due to progressive cracking of cross sections. This expression takes into account, for example, that part of the deflection due to g 1 occurs at time t 2 due to the reduction of stiffness produced by the application of load g 2. The creep of this extra deflection must therefore be referred to time t 2. This is what is achieved by the above expression. In case a construction live load equivalent to the value of g 1+g 2+ 01q is assumed to be applied at time t 1, the above expression is greatly simplified, since no reduction of stiffness occurs after the application of g 1+construction load: f g1 +g2+q, = f g1,(t1,3) + f g1+g2(t2,) - f q1(t2,) + f g1+g2+q(t3,3) - f g1+g2(t3, 3) = f g1,(t1,3) + f g2+q(t2,3) + f q(t3,3) (7.66) Deflections due to shrinkage Deflections due to shrinkage are computed for a stiffness corresponding to the quasi-permanent load condition, taking into account an effective modulus with a creep coefficient corresponding to the start of development of shrinkage (i.e. end of curing), (t,t s). Also, II and III are calculated using E c,eff Parametric study of slenderness limit Introduction ENV :1991 in table 4.14 and MC-90 in table provide slenderness limits for lightly reinforced and heavily reinforced concrete elements. In both cases, for a simply supported beam the Page 7-15

142 Guide to EC2 Section 7 corresponding values are, respectively, L/d=18 and L/d=25. These values are given for a steel yield stress of 400 N/mm 2, and are inversely proportional to the steel grade. This means, that the equivalent values for a 500 N/mm 2 steel would be L/d=14 and L/d=20. There have been complaints in the sense that this table is too conservative, or too general. The parametric study described in the following sections, considers a large range of variables affecting the deformation of concrete structures, in order to quantify their influence and study the possibility of including them in the calculation of the slenderness limit. The present proposal for section 7.4 of pren , is based on this study. The parametric study, which has been carried out according to the procedure described above, considers the influence on the slenderness limit of the following parameters: Complex load history. The influence of the values of t 1, t 2 and t 3 on the slenderness limit has been studied. Control of total deflections vs. control of deflection which produced cracking of partitions (referred to in this document as active deflection). Slenderness limits are calculated by limiting the total deflection to L/250. It has been investigated whether the limitation of the deflection producing cracking of partitions to L/500 can be more restrictive. Influence of relative humidity. The relative humidity affects long term deflections through creep and shrinkage. The influence of this parameter on the slenderness limit has been studied for relative humidity varying from 50 to 80%. Real reinforcement vs. required reinforcement. The effect of considering a 5% to 10% increase in the real reinforcement with respect to the required reinforcement determined from U.L.S. analysis has been studied in order to take into account the round-off in detailing. Distribution of reinforcement. Reinforcement in real beams is not constant. The influence of the real distribution of reinforcement on the slenderness limit has been studied. Concrete grade Percentage of self weight (g 1), additional deal load (flooring and partitions g 2) and quasipermanent live load ( 02q) with respect to the total load (q tot). According to Spanish practice, typical values for these relations could be: - For one-way slabs, G 1 =0,45 Qtot G 2 =0,30 Qtot 02Q = 0,30 0,25 = 0,075 Qtot - For flat slabs, G 1 =0,60 Qtot G 2 =0,20 Qtot 02Q = 0,30 0,20 = 0,06 Qtot For this study, as for pren , the slenderness limit is defined as the relationship between the span and the effective depth L/d. The slenderness limit curves which are presented in the following paragraphs, are given for different reinforcement ratios. The reinforcement ratio,, is defined as the ratio of tensile reinforcement A s, to effective cross section bd Assumptions for parametric study The parametric study which follows has been carried out for a simply supported beam with a cross section of 100 x 30 cm 2. The cover has been assumed as 1/10 of the total depth. The reference values for which the study is formulated are the following: - Relative humidity of 70% - Load history: t 1/t 2/t 3 =10/60/365 days - Permanent load vs. live load: g 1 = 45%q tot, g 2 = 30%q tot and q = 25% of q tot. - Quasi permanent live load is 30% of characteristic live load - Tensile and compressive reinforcements are those strictly needed for ULS. - Concrete Strength: 30 N/mm 2 - Steel Yield Stress: 500 N/mm 2 - Distribution of reinforcement is considered constant over the beam length. For each part of the study, one of the above parameters is varied while the others remain constant. Page 7-16

143 Guide to EC2 Section Method for determining the slenderness ratio In order to determine the slenderness ratio, the following steps were taken for each reinforcement ratio: - A certain span length, L, is assumed. - Calculation of the ultimate bending moment (M ULS). When compression reinforcement is needed in order to yield the tensile reinforcement, compressive reinforcement is provided and taken into account in the calculation of deflections. - The ultimate load, q ULS, is determined from the M ULS, assuming a simply supported beam: MULS q ULS = 8 2 L - The total service load (q tot) is determined from q ULS, and the assumed ratios for g 1/q tot, g 2/q tot and q/q tot, according to: q ULS = 1.35 (g 1 + g 2) q = 1.35 ( ) q tot q tot = 1.38 q tot q tot = 0.72 q ULS - The values of g 1, g 2 and q are determined from the above ratios. - The deflection is computed. According to the general method of pren If the deflection obtained is not L/250 for total deflection or L/500 for active deflection, the procedure is repeated until convergence is achieved Influence of the dimensions of the cross section used The cross section assumed for the parametric study is, as stated above, a rectangular cross section of b x h = 100 x 30 cm 2. In order to insure that the particular dimensions of the cross section are not important, the slenderness limit for different reinforcement ratios has also been determined for the cross section used by Beeby in [2], all other parameters being those taken as reference (see section 3.2). This cross section is rectangular of dimensions b x h = 30 x 50 cm 2. Figure shows the comparison between both rectangular cross sections. As can be seen no significant difference can be observed. Figure Slenderness ratio for two rectangular cross section of different dimensions Influence of load history The load history used for the parametric study is described above in It is assumed that the construction live load is applied at the same time as the self weight so that the section is fully cracked from the beginning. This provides an upper bound estimation for total deflection (not so for active deflection). The reference load history is: t 1/t 2/t 3=10/60/365 days Two other load histories are considered: t 1/t 2/t 3=7/14/365 days and t 1/t 2/t 3=28/90/365 days. The calculation of the slenderness limit has been carried out in this case for two steel ratios: 0.5% and 1.5%. The results are shown in Table 7.5. As can be seen, the influence of the load history is very limited. This suggests that simplifications are possible. One such simplification, consisting in considering a single time of loading together with an equivalent creep coefficient is described in detail in section Table 7.5. Influence of load history on the slenderness limit. ((L/d)(10,60,365)- (L/d)(t1,t2,t3))/ (L/d)(10,60,365) Page 7-17

144 Guide to EC2 Section Influence of additional reinforcement The slenderness ratio is referred to the deflection occurring in case the strict reinforcement is placed in the beam. However, it is normal for structures to have extra reinforcement due to rounding off, on the safe side, of the required values. The influence of this factor has been studied by comparing the deflection of a beam with different required reinforcement ratios in case an extra 5% or 10% reinforcement is provided in tension. The results are given in Fig Figure Influence of round off extra reinforcement in the deflection of a simply supported beam Influence of distribution of reinforcement Distribution of reinforcement in beams is not constant in practice. Normally, minimum reinforcement is placed near the points of zero bending moment (base reinforcement) and a supplementary reinforcement is placed in the areas near the maximum bending moment. The influence of the length of the additional reinforcement has been studied for two reinforcement ratios (0.5% and 1.5%) and assuming a length (l s) of the supplementary reinforcement of 60, 80, 90 and 100% of the span. Outside this length minimum reinforcement was considered. The results are given in Table 7.6 by comparing the deflection for ls=100% to the deflection for the different values of l s. It can be seen that for low values of the reinforcement ratio and no influence is detected. The difference becomes significant only for high reinforcement ratios and small length of additional reinforcement. Table 7.6. Influence of the length of supplementary reinforcement on the deflection of a simply supported beam Active deflection vs. total deflection Table 4.14 of ENV :1991 as well as table 7.4 of pren , has been determined by limiting total deflections. However, as can be seen from figure Fig. 7.20, the limit of active deflection to a maximum value of L/500 is a more strict condition. Further consideration should be given to this fact. Figure 7.20 Slenderness Limit for Total and Active Deflection Page 7-18

145 Guide to EC2 Section Influence of relative humidity The influence of relative humidity on the slenderness limits was studied for two different steel ratios: = 0.5% and = 1.5%. The slenderness limit was determined for these two steel ratios and relative humidity of 50, 60, 70 and 80%. The results are given in Fig Figure Influence of relative humidity on Slenderness Limits for Total and Active Deflections (referred to 70% RH) From Fig it can be seen that the influence of relative humidity on the slenderness ratio is important with a variation of ±15% for the active deflection and ±10% for total deflection from the reference value of 70% of relative humidity. The figure also shows that the influence of relative humidity does not significantly depend on the steel reinforcement ratio Influence of the percentage of self weight, superimposed dead load and live load with respect to total load. For this study, different load distributions have been assumed, including the assumption that the quasi permanent service load, q cp, can be taken as 0.5 times the ultimate limit state (ULS) load. The ULS load is given by the following expression: q ULS = 1.35 (g 1 + g 2) q As explained in section , the ultimate load q ULS is known from the value of the reinforcement. If it is assumed that g g 2, then by fixing different values for the quasi permanent service load (q cp)/ultimate load (q ULS) ratio, g 1, g 2 and q may be determined for each ratio. This provides, in the end, significantly different values for the permanent to live load ratios for the quasi permanent combination. The lower the value of the permanent load, the lower will be the load considered for the verification of deflections, since only 30% of the live load is considered quasi permanent. In Table 7.7, the different ratios of q cp/q ULS considered and the resulting ratios of g 1/q tot, g 2/q tot and q/q tot are given. Table 7.7. Total service load/ultimate load ratios and corresponding values of self weight, superimposed dead load and live load to total service load ratios The comparison of the results of the slenderness limits for the different quasi permanent service load to ultimate load ratios is plotted in Fig As can be seen the difference is important. It is also interesting to note that the values of l/d = 20 for 0.5% reinforcement ratio and l/d=14 for 15% reinforcement ratio, are obtained approximately for a ratio of q cp/q ULS=0.5. Page 7-19

Design of reinforced concrete sections according to EN and EN

Design of reinforced concrete sections according to EN and EN Design of reinforced concrete sections according to EN 1992-1-1 and EN 1992-2 Validation Examples Brno, 21.10.2010 IDEA RS s.r.o. South Moravian Innovation Centre, U Vodarny 2a, 616 00 BRNO tel.: +420-511

More information

Introduction to The Design Example and EN Basis of Design

Introduction to The Design Example and EN Basis of Design EUROCODES Bridges: Background and applications St Petersburg April 2011 1 Introduction to The Design Example and EN 1990 - Basis of Design Professor Steve Denton Engineering Director, Parsons Brinckerhoff

More information

9-3. Structural response

9-3. Structural response 9-3. Structural response in fire František Wald Czech Technical University in Prague Objectives of the lecture The mechanical load in the fire design Response of the structure exposed to fire Levels of

More information

SERVICEABILITY LIMIT STATE DESIGN

SERVICEABILITY LIMIT STATE DESIGN CHAPTER 11 SERVICEABILITY LIMIT STATE DESIGN Article 49. Cracking Limit State 49.1 General considerations In the case of verifications relating to Cracking Limit State, the effects of actions comprise

More information

FINAL DRAFT pren 1990

FINAL DRAFT pren 1990 EUROPEAN STANDARD NORME EUROPÉENNE EUROPÄISCHE NORM FINAL DRAFT pren 1990 July 2001 ICS 91.010.30 Will supersede ENV 1991-1:1994 English version Eurocode - Basis of structural design This draft European

More information

The European Concrete Platform ASBL, May 2008.

The European Concrete Platform ASBL, May 2008. EUROCODE WORKED EXAMPLES EUROCODE WORKED EXAMPLES The European Concrete Platform ASBL, May 008. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted

More information

O Dr Andrew Bond (Geocentrix)

O Dr Andrew Bond (Geocentrix) DECODING EUROCODES 2 + 7: DESIGN SG OF FOUNDATIONS O Dr Andrew Bond (Geocentrix) Outline of talk April 2010: the death of British Standards? UK implementation of Eurocodes Verification of strength: limit

More information

Influence of residual stresses in the structural behavior of. tubular columns and arches. Nuno Rocha Cima Gomes

Influence of residual stresses in the structural behavior of. tubular columns and arches. Nuno Rocha Cima Gomes October 2014 Influence of residual stresses in the structural behavior of Abstract tubular columns and arches Nuno Rocha Cima Gomes Instituto Superior Técnico, Universidade de Lisboa, Portugal Contact:

More information

Eurocode Training EN : Reinforced Concrete

Eurocode Training EN : Reinforced Concrete Eurocode Training EN 1992-1-1: Reinforced Concrete Eurocode Training EN 1992-1-1 All information in this document is subject to modification without prior notice. No part of this manual may be reproduced,

More information

Serviceability Limit States

Serviceability Limit States Serviceability Limit States www.eurocode2.info 1 Outline Crack control and limitations Crack width calculations Crack width calculation example Crack width calculation problem Restraint cracking Deflection

More information

CHAPTER 6: ULTIMATE LIMIT STATE

CHAPTER 6: ULTIMATE LIMIT STATE CHAPTER 6: ULTIMATE LIMIT STATE 6.1 GENERAL It shall be in accordance with JSCE Standard Specification (Design), 6.1. The collapse mechanism in statically indeterminate structures shall not be considered.

More information

Bridge deck modelling and design process for bridges

Bridge deck modelling and design process for bridges EU-Russia Regulatory Dialogue Construction Sector Subgroup 1 Bridge deck modelling and design process for bridges Application to a composite twin-girder bridge according to Eurocode 4 Laurence Davaine

More information

Seminar Worked examples on Bridge Design with Eurocodes

Seminar Worked examples on Bridge Design with Eurocodes 1 EU-Russia Regulatory Dialogue: Construction Sector Subgroup Seminar Worked examples on Bridge Design with Eurocodes St-Petersburg, 17-18 April 2013 Organized and supported by European Commission DG Joint

More information

DESIGN OF DOWELS FOR SHEAR TRANSFER AT THE INTERFACE BETWEEN CONCRETE CAST AT DIFFERENT TIMES: A CASE STUDY

DESIGN OF DOWELS FOR SHEAR TRANSFER AT THE INTERFACE BETWEEN CONCRETE CAST AT DIFFERENT TIMES: A CASE STUDY DESIGN OF DOWELS FOR SHEAR TRANSFER AT THE INTERFACE BETWEEN CONCRETE CAST AT DIFFERENT TIMES: A CASE STUDY Samayamanthree Mudiyanselage Premasiri Karunarathna 118614J Degree of Master of Engineering in

More information

Structural Steelwork Eurocodes Development of A Trans-national Approach

Structural Steelwork Eurocodes Development of A Trans-national Approach Structural Steelwork Eurocodes Development of A Trans-national Approach Course: Eurocode Module 7 : Worked Examples Lecture 0 : Simple braced frame Contents: 1. Simple Braced Frame 1.1 Characteristic Loads

More information

Design of AAC wall panel according to EN 12602

Design of AAC wall panel according to EN 12602 Design of wall panel according to EN 160 Example 3: Wall panel with wind load 1.1 Issue Design of a wall panel at an industrial building Materials with a compressive strength 3,5, density class 500, welded

More information

Practical Design to Eurocode 2

Practical Design to Eurocode 2 Practical Design to Eurocode 2 The webinar will start at 12.30 (Any questions beforehand? use Questions on the GoTo Control Panel) Course Outline Lecture Date Speaker Title 1 21 Sep Jenny Burridge Introduction,

More information

STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS CHAPTER 2. Introduction

STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS CHAPTER 2. Introduction CHAPTER 2 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS Introduction The primary purpose of structural analysis is to establish the distribution of internal forces and moments over the whole part of a structure and to identify

More information

Practical Design to Eurocode 2. The webinar will start at 12.30

Practical Design to Eurocode 2. The webinar will start at 12.30 Practical Design to Eurocode 2 The webinar will start at 12.30 Course Outline Lecture Date Speaker Title 1 21 Sep Jenny Burridge Introduction, Background and Codes 2 28 Sep Charles Goodchild EC2 Background,

More information

Design of Beams (Unit - 8)

Design of Beams (Unit - 8) Design of Beams (Unit - 8) Contents Introduction Beam types Lateral stability of beams Factors affecting lateral stability Behaviour of simple and built - up beams in bending (Without vertical stiffeners)

More information

EUROCODE EN SEISMIC DESIGN OF BRIDGES

EUROCODE EN SEISMIC DESIGN OF BRIDGES Brussels, 18-20 February 2008 Dissemination of information workshop 1 EUROCODE EN1998-2 SEISMIC DESIGN OF BRIDGES Basil Kolias Basic Requirements Brussels, 18-20 February 2008 Dissemination of information

More information

PLATE GIRDERS II. Load. Web plate Welds A Longitudinal elevation. Fig. 1 A typical Plate Girder

PLATE GIRDERS II. Load. Web plate Welds A Longitudinal elevation. Fig. 1 A typical Plate Girder 16 PLATE GIRDERS II 1.0 INTRODUCTION This chapter describes the current practice for the design of plate girders adopting meaningful simplifications of the equations derived in the chapter on Plate Girders

More information

Sabah Shawkat Cabinet of Structural Engineering Walls carrying vertical loads should be designed as columns. Basically walls are designed in

Sabah Shawkat Cabinet of Structural Engineering Walls carrying vertical loads should be designed as columns. Basically walls are designed in Sabah Shawkat Cabinet of Structural Engineering 17 3.6 Shear walls Walls carrying vertical loads should be designed as columns. Basically walls are designed in the same manner as columns, but there are

More information

Finite Element Modelling with Plastic Hinges

Finite Element Modelling with Plastic Hinges 01/02/2016 Marco Donà Finite Element Modelling with Plastic Hinges 1 Plastic hinge approach A plastic hinge represents a concentrated post-yield behaviour in one or more degrees of freedom. Hinges only

More information

Detailing. Lecture 9 16 th November Reinforced Concrete Detailing to Eurocode 2

Detailing. Lecture 9 16 th November Reinforced Concrete Detailing to Eurocode 2 Detailing Lecture 9 16 th November 2017 Reinforced Concrete Detailing to Eurocode 2 EC2 Section 8 - Detailing of Reinforcement - General Rules Bar spacing, Minimum bend diameter Anchorage of reinforcement

More information

Chapter 6 Seismic Design of Bridges. Kazuhiko Kawashima Tokyo Institute of Technology

Chapter 6 Seismic Design of Bridges. Kazuhiko Kawashima Tokyo Institute of Technology Chapter 6 Seismic Design of Bridges Kazuhiko Kawashima okyo Institute of echnology Seismic Design Loading environment (dead, live, wind, earthquake etc) Performance criteria for gravity (deflection, stresses)

More information

DEFORMATION CAPACITY OF OLDER RC SHEAR WALLS: EXPERIMENTAL ASSESSMENT AND COMPARISON WITH EUROCODE 8 - PART 3 PROVISIONS

DEFORMATION CAPACITY OF OLDER RC SHEAR WALLS: EXPERIMENTAL ASSESSMENT AND COMPARISON WITH EUROCODE 8 - PART 3 PROVISIONS DEFORMATION CAPACITY OF OLDER RC SHEAR WALLS: EXPERIMENTAL ASSESSMENT AND COMPARISON WITH EUROCODE 8 - PART 3 PROVISIONS Konstantinos CHRISTIDIS 1, Emmanouil VOUGIOUKAS 2 and Konstantinos TREZOS 3 ABSTRACT

More information

A METHOD OF LOAD INCREMENTS FOR THE DETERMINATION OF SECOND-ORDER LIMIT LOAD AND COLLAPSE SAFETY OF REINFORCED CONCRETE FRAMED STRUCTURES

A METHOD OF LOAD INCREMENTS FOR THE DETERMINATION OF SECOND-ORDER LIMIT LOAD AND COLLAPSE SAFETY OF REINFORCED CONCRETE FRAMED STRUCTURES A METHOD OF LOAD INCREMENTS FOR THE DETERMINATION OF SECOND-ORDER LIMIT LOAD AND COLLAPSE SAFETY OF REINFORCED CONCRETE FRAMED STRUCTURES Konuralp Girgin (Ph.D. Thesis, Institute of Science and Technology,

More information

CHAPTER 4. Design of R C Beams

CHAPTER 4. Design of R C Beams CHAPTER 4 Design of R C Beams Learning Objectives Identify the data, formulae and procedures for design of R C beams Design simply-supported and continuous R C beams by integrating the following processes

More information

Bending and Shear in Beams

Bending and Shear in Beams Bending and Shear in Beams Lecture 3 5 th October 017 Contents Lecture 3 What reinforcement is needed to resist M Ed? Bending/ Flexure Section analysis, singly and doubly reinforced Tension reinforcement,

More information

Composite bridge design (EN1994-2) Bridge modelling and structural analysis

Composite bridge design (EN1994-2) Bridge modelling and structural analysis EUROCODES Bridges: Background and applications Dissemination of information for training Vienna, 4-6 October 2010 1 Composite bridge design (EN1994-2) Bridge modelling and structural analysis Laurence

More information

CHAPTER 4. ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF COLUMNS

CHAPTER 4. ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF COLUMNS 4.1. INTRODUCTION CHAPTER 4. ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF COLUMNS A column is a vertical structural member transmitting axial compression loads with or without moments. The cross sectional dimensions of a column

More information

Note: For further information, including the development of creep with time, Annex B may be used.

Note: For further information, including the development of creep with time, Annex B may be used. ..4 Creep and shrinkage ()P Creep and shrinkage of the concrete depend on the ambient humidity, the dimensions of the element and the composition of the concrete. Creep is also influenced by the maturity

More information

Standardisation of UHPC in Germany

Standardisation of UHPC in Germany Standardisation of UHPC in Germany Part II: Development of Design Rules, University of Siegen Prof. Dr.-Ing. Ekkehard Fehling, University of Kassel 1 Overvie Introduction: Work of the Task Group Design

More information

9.5 Compression Members

9.5 Compression Members 9.5 Compression Members This section covers the following topics. Introduction Analysis Development of Interaction Diagram Effect of Prestressing Force 9.5.1 Introduction Prestressing is meaningful when

More information

However, reliability analysis is not limited to calculation of the probability of failure.

However, reliability analysis is not limited to calculation of the probability of failure. Probabilistic Analysis probabilistic analysis methods, including the first and second-order reliability methods, Monte Carlo simulation, Importance sampling, Latin Hypercube sampling, and stochastic expansions

More information

A PARAMETRIC STUDY ON BUCKLING OF R/C COLUMNS EXPOSED TO FIRE

A PARAMETRIC STUDY ON BUCKLING OF R/C COLUMNS EXPOSED TO FIRE Proceedings of the International Conference in Dubrovnik, 15-16 October 215 A PARAMETRIC STUDY ON BUCKLING OF R/C COLUMNS EXPOSED TO FIRE Lijie Wang, Robby Caspeele, Luc Taerwe Ghent University, Department

More information

Fundamentals of Structural Design Part of Steel Structures

Fundamentals of Structural Design Part of Steel Structures Fundamentals of Structural Design Part of Steel Structures Civil Engineering for Bachelors 133FSTD Teacher: Zdeněk Sokol Office number: B619 1 Syllabus of lectures 1. Introduction, history of steel structures,

More information

- Rectangular Beam Design -

- Rectangular Beam Design - Semester 1 2016/2017 - Rectangular Beam Design - Department of Structures and Material Engineering Faculty of Civil and Environmental Engineering University Tun Hussein Onn Malaysia Introduction The purposes

More information

S TRUCTUR A L PR E- A N A LYSIS TA B LES

S TRUCTUR A L PR E- A N A LYSIS TA B LES M a d e f o r b u i l d i n g b u i l t f o r l i v i n g S TRUTUR A L PR E- A N A LYSIS TA LES I M P R I N T KLH Massivholz GmbH Publisher and responsible for the content: KLH Massivholz GmbH Version:

More information

Delhi Noida Bhopal Hyderabad Jaipur Lucknow Indore Pune Bhubaneswar Kolkata Patna Web: Ph:

Delhi Noida Bhopal Hyderabad Jaipur Lucknow Indore Pune Bhubaneswar Kolkata Patna Web:     Ph: Serial : IG1_CE_G_Concrete Structures_100818 Delhi Noida Bhopal Hyderabad Jaipur Lucknow Indore Pune Bhubaneswar Kolkata Patna Web: E-mail: info@madeeasy.in Ph: 011-451461 CLASS TEST 018-19 CIVIL ENGINEERING

More information

Eurocode 8 Part 3: Assessment and retrofitting of buildings

Eurocode 8 Part 3: Assessment and retrofitting of buildings in the Euro-Mediterranean Area Eurocode 8 Part 3: Assessment and retrofitting of buildings Paolo Emilio Pinto Università di Roma La Sapienza Urgency of guidance documents for assessment and retrofit in

More information

NUMERICAL EVALUATION OF THE ROTATIONAL CAPACITY OF STEEL BEAMS AT ELEVATED TEMPERATURES

NUMERICAL EVALUATION OF THE ROTATIONAL CAPACITY OF STEEL BEAMS AT ELEVATED TEMPERATURES 8 th GRACM International Congress on Computational Mechanics Volos, 12 July 15 July 2015 NUMERICAL EVALUATION OF THE ROTATIONAL CAPACITY OF STEEL BEAMS AT ELEVATED TEMPERATURES Savvas Akritidis, Daphne

More information

Annex - R C Design Formulae and Data

Annex - R C Design Formulae and Data The design formulae and data provided in this Annex are for education, training and assessment purposes only. They are based on the Hong Kong Code of Practice for Structural Use of Concrete 2013 (HKCP-2013).

More information

Practical Design to Eurocode 2

Practical Design to Eurocode 2 Practical Design to Eurocode 2 The webinar will start at 12.30 (I m happy to field individual questions beforehand Use Questions on the shown Control Panel) Course Outline Lecture Date Speaker Title 1

More information

Chapter. Materials. 1.1 Notations Used in This Chapter

Chapter. Materials. 1.1 Notations Used in This Chapter Chapter 1 Materials 1.1 Notations Used in This Chapter A Area of concrete cross-section C s Constant depending on the type of curing C t Creep coefficient (C t = ε sp /ε i ) C u Ultimate creep coefficient

More information

Reliability analysis for structural design

Reliability analysis for structural design Reliability analysis for structural design Reliability analysis for structural design Published by SUN MeDIA Stellenbosch Ryneveld Street, Stellenbosch, 7600 www.africansunmedia.co.za www.sun-e-shop.co.za

More information

Tower Cranes & Foundations The Interface & CIRIA C654 Stuart Marchand C.Eng. FICE FIStructE Director Wentworth House Partnership

Tower Cranes & Foundations The Interface & CIRIA C654 Stuart Marchand C.Eng. FICE FIStructE Director Wentworth House Partnership Tower Cranes & Foundations The Interface & CIRIA C654 Stuart Marchand C.Eng. FICE FIStructE Director Wentworth House Partnership EXAMPLES OF TOWER CRANE FOUNDATION TYPES Rail mounted Pad Base Piled Base

More information

Einführung des EC2 in Belgien The introduction of EC2 in Belgium

Einführung des EC2 in Belgien The introduction of EC2 in Belgium Luc Taerwe 1 Einführung des EC2 in Belgien The introduction of EC2 in Belgium Luc Taerwe Univ.-Prof. Dr.-Ing. habil. Luc Taerwe - graduated as civil engineer at Ghent University (1975) where he also obtained

More information

Risk and Safety in Civil, Surveying and Environmental Engineering

Risk and Safety in Civil, Surveying and Environmental Engineering Risk and Safety in Civil, Surveying and Environmental Engineering Prof. Dr. Michael Havbro Faber ETH Zurich, Switzerland Contents of Today's Lecture Introduction to structural systems reliability General

More information

Bayesian Approach in Structural Tests with Limited Resources

Bayesian Approach in Structural Tests with Limited Resources Bayesian Approach in Structural Tests with Limited Resources *Kidong Park 1), David Webber 2), Changsoon Rha 3), Jidae Park 4), & Junggil Lee 1), 2), 4), 5) Health, Safety & Environment Division, Samsung

More information

Structural Fire Design according to Eurocodes

Structural Fire Design according to Eurocodes Brussels, 18-20 February 2008 Dissemination of information workshop 1 Structural Fire Design according to Eurocodes Joël KRUPPA CTICM Coordinator CEN TC 250 / Horizontal Group "FIRE" ESSENTIAL REQUIREMENTS

More information

Introduction to Fire Design Theory Titular disciplina: Conf. dr. ing. Raul ZAHARIA

Introduction to Fire Design Theory Titular disciplina: Conf. dr. ing. Raul ZAHARIA UNIVERSITATEA POLITEHNICA DIN TIMISOARA FACULTATEA DE CONSTRUCTII CURS MASTER Advanced Design of Steel and Composite Structures AN I, SEM. II Introduction to Fire Design Theory Titular disciplina: Conf.

More information

Eurocode 3 for Dummies The Opportunities and Traps

Eurocode 3 for Dummies The Opportunities and Traps Eurocode 3 for Dummies The Opportunities and Traps a brief guide on element design to EC3 Tim McCarthy Email tim.mccarthy@umist.ac.uk Slides available on the web http://www2.umist.ac.uk/construction/staff/

More information

Flexure: Behavior and Nominal Strength of Beam Sections

Flexure: Behavior and Nominal Strength of Beam Sections 4 5000 4000 (increased d ) (increased f (increased A s or f y ) c or b) Flexure: Behavior and Nominal Strength of Beam Sections Moment (kip-in.) 3000 2000 1000 0 0 (basic) (A s 0.5A s ) 0.0005 0.001 0.0015

More information

Verification of existing reinforced concrete structures using the design value method

Verification of existing reinforced concrete structures using the design value method Verification of existing reinforced concrete structures using the design value method M. Sykora & M. Holicky INTRODUCTION Existing structures are often affected by severe environmental influences that

More information

Pre-stressed concrete = Pre-compression concrete Pre-compression stresses is applied at the place when tensile stress occur Concrete weak in tension

Pre-stressed concrete = Pre-compression concrete Pre-compression stresses is applied at the place when tensile stress occur Concrete weak in tension Pre-stressed concrete = Pre-compression concrete Pre-compression stresses is applied at the place when tensile stress occur Concrete weak in tension but strong in compression Steel tendon is first stressed

More information

Calculation for Moment Capacity of Beam-to- Upright Connections of Steel Storage Pallet Racks

Calculation for Moment Capacity of Beam-to- Upright Connections of Steel Storage Pallet Racks Missouri University of Science and Technology Scholars' Mine International Specialty Conference on Cold- Formed Steel Structures (2014) - 22nd International Specialty Conference on Cold-Formed Steel Structures

More information

Seismic Pushover Analysis Using AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design

Seismic Pushover Analysis Using AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design Seismic Pushover Analysis Using AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design Elmer E. Marx, Alaska Department of Transportation and Public Facilities Michael Keever, California Department

More information

Evaluation of Flexural Stiffness for RC Beams During Fire Events

Evaluation of Flexural Stiffness for RC Beams During Fire Events 3 rd International Structural Specialty Conference 3 ième conférence internationale spécialisée sur le génie des structures Edmonton, Alberta June 6-9, 202 / 6 au 9 juin 202 Evaluation of Flexural Stiffness

More information

3. Stability of built-up members in compression

3. Stability of built-up members in compression 3. Stability of built-up members in compression 3.1 Definitions Build-up members, made out by coupling two or more simple profiles for obtaining stronger and stiffer section are very common in steel structures,

More information

RELIABILITY ASSESSMENT OF EXISTING STRUCTURES

RELIABILITY ASSESSMENT OF EXISTING STRUCTURES 1. Introduction RELIABILITY ASSESSMENT OF EXISTING STRUCTURES EN Eurocodes, presently being implemented into the system of national standards nearly in the whole Europe, are particularly intended for the

More information

Probabilistic assessment of geotechnical objects by means of MONTE CARLO METHOD. Egidijus R. Vaidogas

Probabilistic assessment of geotechnical objects by means of MONTE CARLO METHOD. Egidijus R. Vaidogas Probabilistic assessment of geotechnical objects by means of MONTE CARLO METHOD Egidijus R. Vaidogas Vilnius Gediminas technical university, Lithuania ERASMUS/SOCRATES program, 2007 What is the principal

More information

Advanced Marine Structures Prof. Dr. Srinivasan Chandrasekaran Department of Ocean Engineering Indian Institute of Technology Madras

Advanced Marine Structures Prof. Dr. Srinivasan Chandrasekaran Department of Ocean Engineering Indian Institute of Technology Madras Advanced Marine Structures Prof. Dr. Srinivasan Chandrasekaran Department of Ocean Engineering Indian Institute of Technology Madras Lecture - 13 Ultimate Limit State - II We will now discuss the thirteenth

More information

Structural Steelwork Eurocodes Development of A Trans-national Approach

Structural Steelwork Eurocodes Development of A Trans-national Approach Structural Steelwork Eurocodes Development of A Trans-national Approach Course: Eurocode 3 Module 7 : Worked Examples Lecture 20 : Simple braced frame Contents: 1. Simple Braced Frame 1.1 Characteristic

More information

Earthquake-resistant design of indeterminate reinforced-concrete slender column elements

Earthquake-resistant design of indeterminate reinforced-concrete slender column elements Engineering Structures 29 (2007) 163 175 www.elsevier.com/locate/engstruct Earthquake-resistant design of indeterminate reinforced-concrete slender column elements Gerasimos M. Kotsovos a, Christos Zeris

More information

STEEL JOINTS - COMPONENT METHOD APPLICATION

STEEL JOINTS - COMPONENT METHOD APPLICATION Bulletin of the Transilvania University of Braşov Vol. 5 (54) - 2012 Series 1: Special Issue No. 1 STEEL JOINTS - COPONENT ETHOD APPLICATION D. RADU 1 Abstract: As long as the rotation joint stiffness

More information

Civil Engineering Design (1) Design of Reinforced Concrete Columns 2006/7

Civil Engineering Design (1) Design of Reinforced Concrete Columns 2006/7 Civil Engineering Design (1) Design of Reinforced Concrete Columns 2006/7 Dr. Colin Caprani, Chartered Engineer 1 Contents 1. Introduction... 3 1.1 Background... 3 1.2 Failure Modes... 5 1.3 Design Aspects...

More information

Balcony balustrades using the SG12 laminated glass system: PAGE 1 (SG12FF010717) Structural Calculations for SG12 System balustrades using 21.5mm laminated toughened glass without the need for a handrail

More information

SIMPLIFIED METHOD FOR PREDICTING DEFORMATIONS OF RC FRAMES DURING FIRE EXPOSURE

SIMPLIFIED METHOD FOR PREDICTING DEFORMATIONS OF RC FRAMES DURING FIRE EXPOSURE SIMPLIFIED METHOD FOR PREDICTING DEFORMATIONS OF RC FRAMES DURING FIRE EXPOSURE M.A. Youssef a, S.F. El-Fitiany a a Western University, Faculty of Engineering, London, Ontario, Canada Abstract Structural

More information

REINFORCED CONCRETE DESIGN 1. Design of Column (Examples and Tutorials)

REINFORCED CONCRETE DESIGN 1. Design of Column (Examples and Tutorials) For updated version, please click on http://ocw.ump.edu.my REINFORCED CONCRETE DESIGN 1 Design of Column (Examples and Tutorials) by Dr. Sharifah Maszura Syed Mohsin Faculty of Civil Engineering and Earth

More information

ISO 178 INTERNATIONAL STANDARD. Plastics Determination of flexural properties. Plastiques Détermination des propriétés en flexion

ISO 178 INTERNATIONAL STANDARD. Plastics Determination of flexural properties. Plastiques Détermination des propriétés en flexion INTERNATIONAL STANDARD ISO 178 Fifth edition 2010-12-15 Plastics Determination of flexural properties Plastiques Détermination des propriétés en flexion Reference number ISO 178:2010(E) ISO 2010 PDF disclaimer

More information

Chapter 4. Test results and discussion. 4.1 Introduction to Experimental Results

Chapter 4. Test results and discussion. 4.1 Introduction to Experimental Results Chapter 4 Test results and discussion This chapter presents a discussion of the results obtained from eighteen beam specimens tested at the Structural Technology Laboratory of the Technical University

More information

Seminar Bridge Design with Eurocodes

Seminar Bridge Design with Eurocodes Seminar Bridge Design with Eurocodes JRC Ispra, 1-2 October 2012 1 EU-Russia Regulatory Dialogue: Construction Sector Subgroup Seminar Bridge Design with Eurocodes JRC-Ispra, 1-2 October 2012 Organized

More information

Structural Steelwork Eurocodes Development of a Trans-National Approach

Structural Steelwork Eurocodes Development of a Trans-National Approach Course: Eurocode 4 Structural Steelwork Eurocodes Development of a Trans-National Approach Lecture 9 : Composite joints Annex B References: COST C1: Composite steel-concrete joints in frames for buildings:

More information

STEEL BUILDINGS IN EUROPE. Multi-Storey Steel Buildings Part 10: Technical Software Specification for Composite Beams

STEEL BUILDINGS IN EUROPE. Multi-Storey Steel Buildings Part 10: Technical Software Specification for Composite Beams STEEL BUILDINGS IN EUROPE Multi-Storey Steel Buildings Part 10: Technical Software Specification for Composite Beams Multi-Storey Steel Buildings Part 10: Technical Software Specification for Composite

More information

CRACK FORMATION AND CRACK PROPAGATION INTO THE COMPRESSION ZONE ON REINFORCED CONCRETE BEAM STRUCTURES

CRACK FORMATION AND CRACK PROPAGATION INTO THE COMPRESSION ZONE ON REINFORCED CONCRETE BEAM STRUCTURES S. Kakay et al. Int. J. Comp. Meth. and Exp. Meas. Vol. 5 No. (017) 116 14 CRACK FORMATION AND CRACK PROPAGATION INTO THE COMPRESSION ZONE ON REINFORCED CONCRETE BEAM STRUCTURES SAMDAR KAKAY DANIEL BÅRDSEN

More information

Slenderness Effects for Concrete Columns in Sway Frame - Moment Magnification Method (CSA A )

Slenderness Effects for Concrete Columns in Sway Frame - Moment Magnification Method (CSA A ) Slenderness Effects for Concrete Columns in Sway Frame - Moment Magnification Method (CSA A23.3-94) Slender Concrete Column Design in Sway Frame Buildings Evaluate slenderness effect for columns in a

More information

GATE SOLUTIONS E N G I N E E R I N G

GATE SOLUTIONS E N G I N E E R I N G GATE SOLUTIONS C I V I L E N G I N E E R I N G From (1987-018) Office : F-16, (Lower Basement), Katwaria Sarai, New Delhi-110016 Phone : 011-65064 Mobile : 81309090, 9711853908 E-mail: info@iesmasterpublications.com,

More information

five Mechanics of Materials 1 ARCHITECTURAL STRUCTURES: FORM, BEHAVIOR, AND DESIGN DR. ANNE NICHOLS SUMMER 2017 lecture

five Mechanics of Materials 1 ARCHITECTURAL STRUCTURES: FORM, BEHAVIOR, AND DESIGN DR. ANNE NICHOLS SUMMER 2017 lecture ARCHITECTURAL STRUCTURES: FORM, BEHAVIOR, AND DESIGN DR. ANNE NICHOLS SUMMER 2017 lecture five mechanics www.carttalk.com of materials Mechanics of Materials 1 Mechanics of Materials MECHANICS MATERIALS

More information

ISO 178 INTERNATIONAL STANDARD. Plastics Determination of flexural properties. Plastiques Détermination des propriétés en flexion

ISO 178 INTERNATIONAL STANDARD. Plastics Determination of flexural properties. Plastiques Détermination des propriétés en flexion INTERNATIONAL STANDARD ISO 178 Fourth edition 2001-12-15 Plastics Determination of flexural properties Plastiques Détermination des propriétés en flexion Reference number ISO 2001 PDF disclaimer This PDF

More information

PUNCHING SHEAR CALCULATIONS 1 ACI 318; ADAPT-PT

PUNCHING SHEAR CALCULATIONS 1 ACI 318; ADAPT-PT Structural Concrete Software System TN191_PT7_punching_shear_aci_4 011505 PUNCHING SHEAR CALCULATIONS 1 ACI 318; ADAPT-PT 1. OVERVIEW Punching shear calculation applies to column-supported slabs, classified

More information

Seismic design of bridges

Seismic design of bridges NATIONAL TECHNICAL UNIVERSITY OF ATHENS LABORATORY FOR EARTHQUAKE ENGINEERING Seismic design of bridges Lecture 3 Ioannis N. Psycharis Capacity design Purpose To design structures of ductile behaviour

More information

1. ARRANGEMENT. a. Frame A1-P3. L 1 = 20 m H = 5.23 m L 2 = 20 m H 1 = 8.29 m L 3 = 20 m H 2 = 8.29 m H 3 = 8.39 m. b. Frame P3-P6

1. ARRANGEMENT. a. Frame A1-P3. L 1 = 20 m H = 5.23 m L 2 = 20 m H 1 = 8.29 m L 3 = 20 m H 2 = 8.29 m H 3 = 8.39 m. b. Frame P3-P6 Page 3 Page 4 Substructure Design. ARRANGEMENT a. Frame A-P3 L = 20 m H = 5.23 m L 2 = 20 m H = 8.29 m L 3 = 20 m H 2 = 8.29 m H 3 = 8.39 m b. Frame P3-P6 L = 25 m H 3 = 8.39 m L 2 = 3 m H 4 = 8.5 m L

More information

UNIVERSITÀ DEGLI STUDI DI PADOVA DIPARTIMENTO DI INGEGNERIA CIVILE, EDILE ED AMBIENTALE CORSO DI LAUREA MAGISTRALE IN INGEGNERIA CIVILE

UNIVERSITÀ DEGLI STUDI DI PADOVA DIPARTIMENTO DI INGEGNERIA CIVILE, EDILE ED AMBIENTALE CORSO DI LAUREA MAGISTRALE IN INGEGNERIA CIVILE UNIVERSITÀ DEGLI STUDI DI PADOVA DIPARTIMENTO DI INGEGNERIA CIVILE, EDILE ED AMBIENTALE CORSO DI LAUREA MAGISTRALE IN INGEGNERIA CIVILE Tesi di laurea Magistrale in Ingegneria Civile Curriculum Strutture

More information

Fire resistance assessment of composite steel-concrete structures

Fire resistance assessment of composite steel-concrete structures Workshop Structural Fire Design of Buildings according to the Eurocodes Brussels, 78 November 0 Fire resistance assessment of composite steelconcrete structures Basic design methods Worked examples CAJOT

More information

THE EC3 CLASSIFICATION OF JOINTS AND ALTERNATIVE PROPOSALS

THE EC3 CLASSIFICATION OF JOINTS AND ALTERNATIVE PROPOSALS EUROSTEEL 2002, Coimbra, 19-20 September 2002, p.987-996 THE EC3 CLASSIFICATION OF JOINTS AND ALTERNATIVE PROPOSALS Fernando C. T. Gomes 1 ABSTRACT The Eurocode 3 proposes a classification of beam-to-column

More information

Lecture-08 Gravity Load Analysis of RC Structures

Lecture-08 Gravity Load Analysis of RC Structures Lecture-08 Gravity Load Analysis of RC Structures By: Prof Dr. Qaisar Ali Civil Engineering Department UET Peshawar www.drqaisarali.com 1 Contents Analysis Approaches Point of Inflection Method Equivalent

More information

Fire Analysis of Reinforced Concrete Beams with 2-D Plane Stress Concrete Model

Fire Analysis of Reinforced Concrete Beams with 2-D Plane Stress Concrete Model Research Journal of Applied Sciences, Engineering and Technology 5(2): 398-44, 213 ISSN: 24-7459; E-ISSN: 24-7467 Maxwell Scientific Organization, 213 Submitted: April 29, 212 Accepted: May 23, 212 Published:

More information

Shear Strength of Slender Reinforced Concrete Beams without Web Reinforcement

Shear Strength of Slender Reinforced Concrete Beams without Web Reinforcement RESEARCH ARTICLE OPEN ACCESS Shear Strength of Slender Reinforced Concrete Beams without Web Reinforcement Prof. R.S. Chavan*, Dr. P.M. Pawar ** (Department of Civil Engineering, Solapur University, Solapur)

More information

Associate Professor. Tel:

Associate Professor. Tel: DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING IIT DELHI Dr. Suresh Bhalla Associate Professor Tel: 2659-1040 Email: Sbhalla@civil.iitd.ac.in FOUNDATIONS Geotechnical Engineer Structural Engineer Location and depth criteria

More information

INELASTIC SEISMIC DISPLACEMENT RESPONSE PREDICTION OF MDOF SYSTEMS BY EQUIVALENT LINEARIZATION

INELASTIC SEISMIC DISPLACEMENT RESPONSE PREDICTION OF MDOF SYSTEMS BY EQUIVALENT LINEARIZATION INEASTIC SEISMIC DISPACEMENT RESPONSE PREDICTION OF MDOF SYSTEMS BY EQUIVAENT INEARIZATION M. S. Günay 1 and H. Sucuoğlu 1 Research Assistant, Dept. of Civil Engineering, Middle East Technical University,

More information

Experimental Study and Numerical Simulation on Steel Plate Girders With Deep Section

Experimental Study and Numerical Simulation on Steel Plate Girders With Deep Section 6 th International Conference on Advances in Experimental Structural Engineering 11 th International Workshop on Advanced Smart Materials and Smart Structures Technology August 1-2, 2015, University of

More information

MODELING THE EFFECTIVE ELASTIC MODULUS OF RC BEAMS EXPOSED TO FIRE

MODELING THE EFFECTIVE ELASTIC MODULUS OF RC BEAMS EXPOSED TO FIRE Journal of Marine Science and Technology, Vol., No., pp. -8 () MODELING THE EFFECTIVE ELASTIC MODULUS OF RC BEAMS EXPOSED TO FIRE Jui-Hsiang Hsu*, ***, Cherng-Shing Lin**, and Chang-Bin Huang*** Key words:

More information

COURSE TITLE : APPLIED MECHANICS & STRENGTH OF MATERIALS COURSE CODE : 4017 COURSE CATEGORY : A PERIODS/WEEK : 6 PERIODS/ SEMESTER : 108 CREDITS : 5

COURSE TITLE : APPLIED MECHANICS & STRENGTH OF MATERIALS COURSE CODE : 4017 COURSE CATEGORY : A PERIODS/WEEK : 6 PERIODS/ SEMESTER : 108 CREDITS : 5 COURSE TITLE : APPLIED MECHANICS & STRENGTH OF MATERIALS COURSE CODE : 4017 COURSE CATEGORY : A PERIODS/WEEK : 6 PERIODS/ SEMESTER : 108 CREDITS : 5 TIME SCHEDULE MODULE TOPICS PERIODS 1 Simple stresses

More information

Structural Calculations for Juliet balconies using BALCONY 2 System (Aerofoil) handrail. Our ref: JULB2NB Date of issue: March 2017

Structural Calculations for Juliet balconies using BALCONY 2 System (Aerofoil) handrail. Our ref: JULB2NB Date of issue: March 2017 Juliet balconies using BALCONY 2 System (Aerofoil) handrail PAGE 1 (ref: JULB2NB280317) Structural Calculations for Juliet balconies using BALCONY 2 System (Aerofoil) handrail Our ref: JULB2NB280317 Date

More information

Comparison of Structural Models for Seismic Analysis of Multi-Storey Frame Buildings

Comparison of Structural Models for Seismic Analysis of Multi-Storey Frame Buildings Comparison of Structural Models for Seismic Analysis of Multi-Storey Frame Buildings Dj. Ladjinovic, A. Raseta, A. Radujkovic & R. Folic University of Novi Sad, Faculty of Technical Sciences, Novi Sad,

More information

Harmonized European standards for construction in Egypt

Harmonized European standards for construction in Egypt Harmonized European standards for construction in Egypt EN 1998 - Design of structures for earthquake resistance Jean-Armand Calgaro Chairman of CEN/TC250 Organised with the support of the Egyptian Organization

More information

Mechanics of Materials Primer

Mechanics of Materials Primer Mechanics of Materials rimer Notation: A = area (net = with holes, bearing = in contact, etc...) b = total width of material at a horizontal section d = diameter of a hole D = symbol for diameter E = modulus

More information

Entrance exam Master Course

Entrance exam Master Course - 1 - Guidelines for completion of test: On each page, fill in your name and your application code Each question has four answers while only one answer is correct. o Marked correct answer means 4 points

More information